# Commission Regulation (EU) No 1302/2014Show full title

Commission Regulation (EU) No 1302/2014 of 18 November 2014 concerning a technical specification for interoperability relating            to the ‘rolling stock — locomotives and passenger rolling stock’ subsystem of the rail system in the European Union (Text            with EEA relevance)         

        - Previous
        - Next

U.K.

# Commission Regulation (EU) No 1302/2014                     

# of 18 November 2014

# concerning a technical specification for interoperability relating to the ‘rolling stock — locomotives and passenger rolling                        stock’ subsystem of the rail system in the European Union                     

# (Text with EEA relevance)

THE EUROPEAN COMMISSION,

Having regard to the Treaty on the Functioning of the European Union,

Having regard to Directive 2008/57/EC of the European Parliament and of the Council of 17 June 2008 on the interoperability                           of the rail system within the Community(1), and in particular Article 6(1) second subparagraph thereof,                        

Whereas:

(1)Article 12 of Regulation (EC) No 881/2004 of the European Parliament and of the Council(2) establishing a European Railway Agency (Agency Regulation) requires the European Railway Agency (hereinafter ‘the Agency’)                              to ensure that the technical specifications for interoperability (hereinafter the ‘TSIs’) are adapted to technical progress,                              market trends and social requirements and to propose to the Commission the amendments to the TSIs which it considers necessary.

(2)By Decision C(2010) 2576 of 29 April 2010, the Commission gave the Agency a mandate to develop and review the TSI's with a                              view to extending their scope to the whole rail system in the Union. Under the terms of that mandate, the Agency was requested                              to extend the scope of the TSI relating to the subsystem ‘rolling stock — locomotives and passenger rolling stock’, to the                              whole rail system in the Union.

(3)On 12 December 2012, the Agency issued a recommendation on the revised TSI relating to the subsystem ‘rolling stock — locomotives                              and passenger rolling stock’.

(4)In order to follow technological evolution and encourage modernisation, innovative solutions should be promoted and their                              implementation should, under certain conditions, be allowed. Where an innovative solution is proposed, the manufacturer or                              his authorised representative should state how they deviate from or how they complement to the relevant section of the TSI,                              and the innovative solution should be assessed by the Commission. If this assessment is positive, the Agency should define                              the appropriate functional and interface specifications of the innovative solution and develop the relevant assessment methods.

(5)The TSI on rolling stock established by this Regulation does not deal with all essential requirements. In accordance with                              Article 5(6) of Directive 2008/57/EC, technical aspects which are not covered by it should be identified as ‘open points’                              governed by national rules applicable in each Member State.

(6)In accordance with Article 17(3) of Directive 2008/57/EC, Member States are to notify the Commission and other Member States                              the technical rules, the conformity assessment and verification procedures to be used for the specific cases, and the bodies                              responsible for carrying out these procedures. The same obligation should be provided as regards to open points.

(7)Rolling stock currently operates under existing national, bilateral, multinational or international agreements. It is important                              that these agreements do not hinder current and future progress towards interoperability. The Member States should therefore                              notify such agreements to the Commission.

(8)In accordance with Article 11(5) of Directive 2008/57/EC, the TSI on rolling stock should allow, for a limited period of time,                              for interoperability constituents to be incorporated into subsystems without certification if certain conditions are met.

(9)Commission Decisions 2008/232/EC(3) and 2011/291/EU(4) should therefore be repealed.

(10)In order to prevent unnecessary additional costs and administrative burden, Decisions 2008/232/EC and 2011/291/EU should continue                              to apply after their repeal to the subsystems and projects referred to in Article 9(1)(a) of Directive 2008/57/EC.

(11)The measures provided for in this Regulation are in accordance with the opinion of the Committee established in accordance                              with Article 29(1) of Directive 2008/57/EC,

HAS ADOPTED THIS REGULATION:

# Article 1U.K.

The technical specification for interoperability (TSI) relating to the ‘rolling stock — locomotives and passengers rolling                     stock’ subsystem of the rail system in the entire European Union, as set out in the Annex, is hereby adopted.                  

# Article 2U.K.

1.The TSI shall apply to the ‘rolling stock’ subsystem as described in [F1point 2.7 of Annex II to Directive (EU) 2016/797 of the European Parliament and of the Council] (5) which is, or is intended to be, operated on the rail network defined in point 1.2 of the Annex and which falls under one                        of the following types:                  

(a)self-propelling thermal or electric trains;                  

(b)thermal or electric traction units;                  

(c)passenger carriages;                  

(d)mobile railway infrastructure construction and maintenance equipment.                  

2.The TSI shall apply to the rolling stock referred to in paragraph 1 which is intended to be operated on one or more of the                        following nominal track gauges: 1 435 mm, 1 520 mm, 1 524 mm, 1 600 mm and 1 668 mm, as stated in Section 2.3.2 of the Annex.                  

Textual Amendments

F1Substituted by Commission Implementing Regulation (EU) 2019/776 of 16 May 2019 amending Commission Regulations (EU) No 321/2013, (EU) No                                 1299/2014, (EU) No 1301/2014, (EU) No 1302/2014, (EU) No 1303/2014 and (EU) 2016/919 and Commission Implementing Decision                                 2011/665/EU as regards the alignment with Directive (EU) 2016/797 of the European Parliament and of the Council and the implementation                                 of specific objectives set out in Commission Delegated Decision (EU) 2017/1474 (Text with EEA relevance).

# Article 3U.K.

1.Without prejudice to Articles 8 and 9, and point 7.1.1 of the Annex, the TSI shall apply to all new rolling stock of the rail                        system in the Union, defined in Article 2(1), which is placed in service from 1 January 2015.                  

[F12.The TSI shall not apply to existing rolling stock of the rail system in the Union which is already placed in service on all                           or part of the network of any Member State on 1 January 2015, except when it is subject to renewal or upgrading in accordance with Section 7.1.2 of the Annex.]                  

3.The technical and geographical scope of this Regulation is set out in Sections 1.1 and 1.2 of the Annex.                  

4.The fitment of the on-board energy measurement system defined in clause 4.2.8.2.8 of the Annex is mandatory for new, upgraded                        and renewed vehicles intended to be operated on networks equipped with the on-ground energy data collecting system (DCS) defined                        in point 4.2.17 of Commission Regulation (EU) No 1301/2014(6).                  

Textual Amendments

F1Substituted by Commission Implementing Regulation (EU) 2019/776 of 16 May 2019 amending Commission Regulations (EU) No 321/2013, (EU) No                                 1299/2014, (EU) No 1301/2014, (EU) No 1302/2014, (EU) No 1303/2014 and (EU) 2016/919 and Commission Implementing Decision                                 2011/665/EU as regards the alignment with Directive (EU) 2016/797 of the European Parliament and of the Council and the implementation                                 of specific objectives set out in Commission Delegated Decision (EU) 2017/1474 (Text with EEA relevance).

# Article 4U.K.

[F11.With regard to the aspects listed as ‘open points’ in Appendix I of the Annex, the conditions to be complied with for verifying the essential requirements set out in Annex                           III to Directive (EU) 2016/797 shall be those laid down by national rules in force in the Member States which are part of                           the area of use of the vehicles covered by this Regulation.]                  

2.Within six months of the entry into force of this Regulation, each Member State shall send to the other Member States and                        the Commission the following information, unless such information has already been sent to them under Commission Decisions                        2008/232/EC or 2011/291/EU:                  

(a)the national rules referred to in paragraph 1;                  

(b)the conformity assessment and verification procedures to be carried out to apply the national rules referred to in paragraph                        1;                  

[F1(c)the bodies designated to carry out the conformity assessment and verification procedures with respect to the open points.]                  

Textual Amendments

F1Substituted by Commission Implementing Regulation (EU) 2019/776 of 16 May 2019 amending Commission Regulations (EU) No 321/2013, (EU) No                                 1299/2014, (EU) No 1301/2014, (EU) No 1302/2014, (EU) No 1303/2014 and (EU) 2016/919 and Commission Implementing Decision                                 2011/665/EU as regards the alignment with Directive (EU) 2016/797 of the European Parliament and of the Council and the implementation                                 of specific objectives set out in Commission Delegated Decision (EU) 2017/1474 (Text with EEA relevance).

# Article 5U.K.

[F11.With regard to specific cases listed in Section 7.3 of the Annex, the conditions to be met for the verification of the essential                           requirements set out in Annex III to Directive (EU) 2016/797 shall be those laid down in Section 7.3 of the Annex or by national                           rules in force in the Member States which are part of the area of use of the vehicles covered by this Regulation.]                  

2.Within six months of the entry into force of this Regulation, each Member State shall notify the other Member States and to                        the Commission with:                  

(a)the national rules referred to in paragraph 1;                  

(b)the conformity assessment and verification procedures to be carried out to apply the national rules referred to in paragraph                        1;                  

[F1(c)the bodies designated to carry out the conformity assessment and verification procedures for the national rules relating to                           the specific cases set out in point 7.3 of the Annex.]                  

Textual Amendments

F1Substituted by Commission Implementing Regulation (EU) 2019/776 of 16 May 2019 amending Commission Regulations (EU) No 321/2013, (EU) No                                 1299/2014, (EU) No 1301/2014, (EU) No 1302/2014, (EU) No 1303/2014 and (EU) 2016/919 and Commission Implementing Decision                                 2011/665/EU as regards the alignment with Directive (EU) 2016/797 of the European Parliament and of the Council and the implementation                                 of specific objectives set out in Commission Delegated Decision (EU) 2017/1474 (Text with EEA relevance).

# Article 6U.K.

1.Without prejudice to the agreements which have already been notified under Decision 2008/232/EC, and shall not be notified                        again, Member States shall notify the Commission, within six months of the entry into force of this Regulation, any existing                        national, bilateral, multilateral or international agreements under which the rolling stock within the scope of this Regulation                        is operated.                  

2.Member States shall forthwith notify the Commission with any future agreements or modifications of existing agreements.                  

# Article 7U.K.

In accordance with Article 9(3) of Directive 2008/57/EC, each Member State shall communicate to the Commission within one                     year of the entry into force of this Regulation the list of projects being implemented within its territory and are at an                     advanced stage of development.                  

# Article 8U.K.

1.An ‘EC’ certificate of verification for a subsystem that contains interoperability constituents which do not have an ‘EC’                        declaration of conformity or suitability for use may be issued during a transitional period ending on 31 May 2017 provided                        the provisions laid down in Section 6.3 of the Annex are met.                  

2.The production or upgrade/renewal of the subsystem using non-certified interoperability constituents shall be completed within                        the transitional period set out in paragraph 1, including the placing in service.                  

3.During the transitional period set out in paragraph 1:                  

(a)the reasons for non-certification of any interoperability constituents shall be properly identified by the notified body before                        granting the ‘EC’ certificate pursuant to [F1Article 15 of Directive (EU) 2016/797];                  

(b)the national safety authorities, pursuant to [F1Article 16(2)(d) of Directive (EU) 2016/798 of the European Parliament and of the Council] (7), shall report on the use of non-certified interoperability constituents in the context of authorisation procedures in their                        annual report referred to in [F1Article 19 of Directive (EU) 2016/798].                  

4.After one year from the entry into force of this Regulation, newly produced interoperability constituents shall be covered                        by the ‘EC’ declaration of conformity or suitability for use.                  

Textual Amendments

F1Substituted by Commission Implementing Regulation (EU) 2019/776 of 16 May 2019 amending Commission Regulations (EU) No 321/2013, (EU) No                                 1299/2014, (EU) No 1301/2014, (EU) No 1302/2014, (EU) No 1303/2014 and (EU) 2016/919 and Commission Implementing Decision                                 2011/665/EU as regards the alignment with Directive (EU) 2016/797 of the European Parliament and of the Council and the implementation                                 of specific objectives set out in Commission Delegated Decision (EU) 2017/1474 (Text with EEA relevance).

# Article 9U.K.

The declaration of verification of a subsystem referred to in [F1Articles 13 to 15 of Directive (EU) 2016/797] and/or the declaration of conformity to type of a new vehicle referred to in [F1Article 24 of Directive (EU) 2016/797] established in accordance with Decision 2008/232/EC or Decision 2011/291/EU shall be considered valid until the Member States                     decide that the type or design certificate needs to be renewed as stated in those Decisions.                  

Textual Amendments

F1Substituted by Commission Implementing Regulation (EU) 2019/776 of 16 May 2019 amending Commission Regulations (EU) No 321/2013, (EU) No                                 1299/2014, (EU) No 1301/2014, (EU) No 1302/2014, (EU) No 1303/2014 and (EU) 2016/919 and Commission Implementing Decision                                 2011/665/EU as regards the alignment with Directive (EU) 2016/797 of the European Parliament and of the Council and the implementation                                 of specific objectives set out in Commission Delegated Decision (EU) 2017/1474 (Text with EEA relevance).

# Article 10U.K.

1.In order to keep pace with technological progress, innovative solutions may be required, which do not comply with the specifications                        set out in the Annex and/or for which the assessment methods set out in the Annex cannot be applied. In that case, new specifications                        and/or new assessment methods associated with those innovative solutions shall be developed.                  

2.Innovative solutions may be related to the rolling stock subsystem, its parts and its interoperability constituents.                  

3.If an innovative solution is proposed, the manufacturer or his authorised representative established within the Union shall                        declare how it deviates from or complements to the relevant provisions of this TSI and submit the deviations to the Commission                        for analysis. The Commission may request the opinion of the European Railway Agency (the Agency) on the proposed innovative                        solution.                  

4.The Commission delivers an opinion on the innovative solution proposed. If this opinion is positive, the appropriate functional                        and interface specifications and the assessment method, which need to be included in the TSI in order to allow the use of                        this innovative solution, shall be developed and subsequently integrated in the TSI during the revision process pursuant to                        [F1Article 5 of Directive (EU) 2016/797]. If the opinion is negative, the innovative solution proposed cannot be applied.                  

5.Pending the review of the TSI, the positive opinion delivered by the Commission shall be considered as acceptable means of                        compliance with the essential requirements of [F1Directive (EU) 2016/797] and may therefore be used for the assessment of the subsystem.                  

Textual Amendments

F1Substituted by Commission Implementing Regulation (EU) 2019/776 of 16 May 2019 amending Commission Regulations (EU) No 321/2013, (EU) No                                 1299/2014, (EU) No 1301/2014, (EU) No 1302/2014, (EU) No 1303/2014 and (EU) 2016/919 and Commission Implementing Decision                                 2011/665/EU as regards the alignment with Directive (EU) 2016/797 of the European Parliament and of the Council and the implementation                                 of specific objectives set out in Commission Delegated Decision (EU) 2017/1474 (Text with EEA relevance).

# Article 11U.K.

1.Decisions 2008/232/EC and 2011/291/EU are repealed with effect from 1 January 2015.                  

They shall however continue to apply to:

(a)subsystems authorised in accordance with these Decisions;                  

(b)cases referred to in Article 9 of this Regulation;                  

(c)projects for new, renewed or upgraded subsystems which, at the date of publication of this Regulation, are at an advanced                        stage of development, are of an existing design or are the subject of a contract which is being carried out, as referred to                        in point 7.1.1.2 of the Annex to this Regulation.                  

2.Decision 2008/232/EC continues to apply for noise and crosswind requirements under the conditions set out in point 7.1.1.6                        and 7.1.1.7 of the Annex to this Regulation.                  

[F23.Section 7.1.3.1 of the Annex to this Regulation shall not apply for vehicles placed on the market after 31 December 2028. Vehicles placed on the market after that date shall be conform to chapters 4, 5 and 6 of the Annex to the present Regulation.]                  

[F24.Member States may only in duly justified cases permit applicants not to apply this Regulation or parts of it pursuant to Article                           7(1)(a) of Directive 2016/797/EC for projects for which the possibility to apply sections 7.1.1.2 or 7.1.3.1 of the Annex                           exists or has expired. The application of sections 7.1.1.2 or 7.1.3.1 of the Annex does not require the application of Article                           7(1)(a) of Directive 2016/797/EC.]                  

Textual Amendments

F2Inserted by Commission Implementing Regulation (EU) 2019/776 of 16 May 2019 amending Commission Regulations (EU) No 321/2013, (EU) No                                 1299/2014, (EU) No 1301/2014, (EU) No 1302/2014, (EU) No 1303/2014 and (EU) 2016/919 and Commission Implementing Decision                                 2011/665/EU as regards the alignment with Directive (EU) 2016/797 of the European Parliament and of the Council and the implementation                                 of specific objectives set out in Commission Delegated Decision (EU) 2017/1474 (Text with EEA relevance).

# Article 12U.K.

This Regulation shall enter into force on the twentieth day following that of its publication in the *Official Journal of the European Union*.                  

It shall apply from 1 January 2015. However, an authorisation for placing in service may be granted in accordance with the                     TSI as set out in the Annex to this Regulation, before 1 January 2015.                  

This Regulation shall be binding in its entirety and directly applicable in all Member States.

## ANNEXU.K.

### 1.INTRODUCTIONU.K.

#### 1.1.**Technical Scope**U.K.

This technical specification for interoperability (TSI) is a specification by which a particular subsystem is addressed in                     order to meet the essential requirements and ensure the interoperability of the Union's rail system as described in [F1Article 1 of Directive (EU) 2016/797].                  

The particular subsystem is the rolling stock of the Union's rail system referred to in [F1section 2.7 of Annex II to Directive (EU) 2016/797].                  

This TSI is applicable to rolling stock:
          -  which is (or is intended to be) operated on the rail network defined in the Section 1.2 ‘Geographical scope’ of this TSI,  and 
          -  which is of one of the following types (as defined in [F1section 2 of Annex I to Directive (EU) 2016/797]):                                      -  Self-propelling thermal or electric trains, 
            -  Thermal or electric traction units, 
            -  Passenger carriages, 
            -  Mobile railway infrastructure construction and maintenance equipment. 

Rolling stock of the types mentioned in [F1Articles 1(3) and (4) of Directive (EU) 2016/797] are excluded from the scope of this TSI:                  
          -  Metros, tram, and other light rail vehicles, 
          -  Vehicles for the operation of local, urban or suburban passenger services on networks that are functionally separate from                           the rest of the railway system,                         
          -  Vehicles exclusively used on privately owned railway infrastructure that exists solely for use by the owner for its own freight                           operations,                         
          -  Vehicles reserved for a strictly local, historical or touristic use. 

The detailed definition of the rolling stock in the scope of this TSI is given in Chapter 2.

#### [F11.2.**Geographical Scope**U.K.

The geographical scope of this TSI is the Union rail system as set out in Annex I to Directive (EU) 2016/797 and excludes                        the cases referred to in Articles 1(3) and (4) of Directive (EU) 2016/797.;                   

#### 1.3.**Content of this TSI**U.K.

In accordance with Article 4(3) of Directive (EU) 2016/797, this TSI:                   

indicates its intended scope (Chapter 2);                            

lays down essential requirements for the subsystem rolling stock ‘Locomotives and passenger rolling stock’ and its interfaces vis-à-vis other subsystems (Chapter 3);                            

establishes the functional and technical specifications to be met by the subsystem and its interfaces vis-à-vis other subsystems                                 (Chapter 4);                            

determines the interoperability constituents and interfaces which must be covered by European specifications, including European                                 standards, which are necessary to achieve interoperability within the European Union's rail system (Chapter 5);                            

states, in each case under consideration, which procedures are to be used in order to assess the conformity or the suitability                                 for use of the interoperability constituents, on the one hand, or the ‘EC’ verification of the subsystems, on the other hand (Chapter 6);                            

indicates the strategy for implementing this TSI (Chapter 7);                            

indicates for the staff concerned, the professional qualifications and health and safety conditions at work required for the                                 operation and maintenance of the subsystem, as well as for the implementation of this TSI (Chapter 4);                            

indicates the provisions applicable to the existing ‘rolling stock’ subsystem, in particular in the event of upgrading and renewal and, in such cases, the modification work which requires an                                 application for a new authorisation;                            

indicates the parameters of ‘rolling stock’ subsystem to be checked by the railway undertaking and the procedures to be applied to check those parameters after the delivery                                 of the vehicle authorisation for placing on the market and before the first use of the vehicle to ensure compatibility between                                 vehicles and the routes on which they are to be operated.                            

In accordance with Article 4(5) of the Directive (EU) 2016/797, provisions for specific cases are indicated in Chapter 7.]                   

### 2.ROLLING STOCK SUBSYSTEM AND FUNCTIONSU.K.

#### 2.1.**The rolling stock subsystem as part of the Union's rail system**U.K.

The Union's rail system has been broken down into the following subsystems as defined in Annex II (Section 1) of [F1Directive (EU) 2016/797].                  

Structural areas:
                -  Infrastructure, 
                -  Energy, 
                -  trackside control-command and signalling, 
                -  on-board control-command and signalling, 
                -  rolling stock; 

Functional areas:
                -  Operation and traffic management, 
                -  Maintenance, 
                -  telematics applications for passenger and freight services. 

With the exception of maintenance, each sub-system is dealt with in specific TSI(s).

The rolling stock subsystem dealt with in this TSI (as defined in Section 1.1) has interfaces with all other subsystems of                     the Union rail system mentioned above; these interfaces are considered within the frame of an integrated system, compliant                     with all the relevant TSIs.                  

Additionally, there are two TSIs describing specific aspects of the railway system and concerning several subsystems, the                     rolling stock subsystem being one of them:                  

safety in railway tunnels (TSI SRT);

accessibility for people with reduced mobility (TSI PRM);

and two TSIs concerning particular aspects of the rolling stock subsystem:

noise (TSI Noise);

freight wagons.

The requirements concerning the rolling stock subsystem expressed in these four TSIs are not repeated in the present TSI.                     These four TSIs apply also for the rolling stock subsystem according to their respective scopes and implementation rules.                  

#### 2.2.**Definitions related to rolling stock**U.K.

For the purpose of this TSI, the following definitions apply:

##### 2.2.1.*Train formation:*U.K.

A ‘unit’ is the generic term used to name the rolling stock which is subject to the application of this TSI, and therefore                              subject to ‘EC’ verification.                           

A Unit may be composed of several ‘vehicles’, as defined in [F1point (3) of Article 2 of Directive (EU) 2016/797], Article 2(c); considering the scope of this TSI, the use of the term ‘vehicle’ in this TSI is limited to the rolling stock                              subsystem as defined in Chapter 1.                           

A ‘train’ is an operational formation consisting of one or more units.

A ‘passenger train’ is an operational formation accessible to passengers (a train composed of passenger vehicles but not accessible                              to passengers is not considered as a passenger train).                           

A ‘fixed formation’ is a train formation that can only be reconfigured within a workshop environment.

A ‘predefined formation(s)’ is a train formation(s) of several units coupled together, which is defined at design stage and                              can be reconfigured during operation.                           

‘Multiple operation’: is an operational formation consisting of more than one unit:
                -  Trainsets designed so that several of them (of the type under assessment) are capable of being coupled together to operate                                    as a single train controlled from 1 driver's cab.                                  
                -  Locomotives designed so that several of them (of the type under assessment) are capable of being included in a single train                                    controlled from 1 driver's cab.                                  

‘General operation’: A unit is designed for general operation when the unit is intended to be coupled with other unit(s) in                              a train formation which **is not defined** at design stage.                           

##### [F12.2.2.*Rolling stock*U.K.

Definitions below are classified in three groups as defined in the section 2 of Annex I to Directive (EU) 2016/797:                   

Locomotives and passenger rolling stock, including thermal or electric traction units, self-propelling thermal or electric                                 passenger trains, and passenger coaches:                            

###### (1)*Thermal or electric traction units*U.K.

A Locomotive is a traction vehicle (or combination of several vehicles) that is not intended to carry a payload and has the                                 ability to be uncoupled in normal operation from a train and to operate independently.                            

A Shunter is a traction unit designed for use only on shunting yards, stations and depots.                            

Traction in a train can also be provided by a powered vehicle with or without driving cab, which is not intended to be uncoupled                                 during normal operation. Such a vehicle is called a Power Unit (or power car) in general or a Power Head when located at one                                 end of the trainset and fitted with a driving cab.                            

###### (2)*Self-propelling thermal or electric passenger trains*U.K.

A Trainset is a fixed formation that can operate as a train; it is by definition not intended to be reconfigured, except within                                 a workshop environment. It is composed of only motored or of motored and non-motored vehicles.                            

An Electric and/or Diesel Multiple Unit is a trainset in which all vehicles are capable of carrying a payload (passengers                                 or luggage/mail or freight).                            

A Railcar is a vehicle that can operate autonomously and is capable of carrying a payload (passengers or luggage/mail or freight).                            

A tram – train is a vehicle designed for combined use on both a light-rail infrastructure and a heavy-rail infrastructure;                            

###### (3)*Passenger coaches and other related cars*U.K.

A Coach is a vehicle without traction in a fixed or variable formation capable of carrying passengers (by extension, requirements                                 specified to apply to coaches in this TSI are deemed to apply also to restaurant cars, sleeping cars, couchettes cars, etc.).                            

A Van is a vehicle without traction capable of carrying payload other than passengers, e.g. luggage or mail, intended to be                                 integrated into a fixed or variable formation which is intended to transport passengers.                            

A Driving Trailer is a vehicle without traction equipped with a driving cab.                            

A coach may be equipped with a driver's cab; such a coach is then named a Driving Coach.                            

A van may be fitted with a driver's cab and as such is known as a Driving Van.                            

A Car carrier is a vehicle without traction capable of carrying passenger motor cars without their passengers and which is                                 intended to be integrated in a passenger train.                            

A Fixed Rake of Coaches is a formation of several coaches ‘semi-permanently’ coupled together, or which can be reconfigured only when it is out of service.                            

Freight wagons, including low-deck vehicles designed for the entire network and vehicles designed to carry lorries                            

These vehicles are out of the scope of this TSI.. They are covered by Regulation (EU) No 321/2013 (the ‘freight wagons’ TSI).                            

Special vehicles, such as on-track machines.                            

On track Machines (OTMs) are vehicles specially designed for construction and maintenance of the track and infrastructure.                                 OTMs are used in different modes: working mode, transport mode as self-propelling vehicle, transport mode as a hauled vehicle.                            

Infrastructure inspection vehicles are utilised to monitor the condition of the infrastructure. They are operated in the same                                 way as freight or passenger trains, with no distinction between transport and working modes.]                            

#### 2.3.**Rolling stock in the scope of this TSI**U.K.

##### [F12.3.1.*Types of rolling stock*U.K.

The scope of this TSI concerning rolling stock, classified in three groups as defined in the Annex I section 2 of Directive                        (EU) 2016/797, is detailed as follows:                   

Locomotives and passenger rolling stock, including thermal or electric traction units, self-propelling thermal or electric                                 passenger trains, and passenger coaches                            

###### (1)*Thermal or electric traction units*U.K.

This type includes traction vehicles that are not capable of carrying a payload, such as thermal or electric locomotives or                                 power units.                            

The concerned traction vehicles are intended for freight or/and passenger transport.                            

Exclusion from the scope:                            

Shunters (as defined in Section 2.2) are not in the scope of this TSI. When they are intended to operate on the Union railway                                 network (movement between shunting yards, stations and depots), article 1.4(b) of Directive (EU) 2016/797 applies.                            

###### (2)*Self-propelling thermal or electric passenger trains*U.K.

This type includes any train in fixed or pre-defined formation, composed of vehicles passenger carrying and/or vehicles not                                 carrying passengers.                            

Thermal or electric traction equipment is installed in some vehicles of the train, and the train is fitted with a driver's                                 cab.                            

Exclusion from the scope:                            

In accordance with Articles 1.3, 1.4(d) and 1.5 of Directive (EU) 2016/797, the following rolling stock is excluded from the                                 scope of the TSI:                            
                -  Rolling stock intended to operate on local, urban or suburban networks functionally separate from the rest of the railway                                       system.                                   
                -  Rolling stock primarily used on light rail infrastructure but equipped with some heavy rail components necessary to enable                                       transit to be effected on a confined and limited section of heavy rail infrastructure for connectivity purposes only.                                   
                -  Tram – trains.                                   

###### (3)*Passenger coaches and other related cars*U.K.

Passenger carriages:                            

This type includes vehicles without traction carrying passengers (coaches, as defined in Section 2.2), and operated in a variable                                 formation with vehicles from the category ‘thermal or electric traction units’ defined above to provide the traction function.                            

Non-passenger carrying vehicles included in a passenger train:                            

This type includes vehicles without traction included in passenger trains (e.g. luggage or postal vans, car carriers, vehicles                                 for service...); they are in the scope of this TSI, as vehicles related to transport of passengers.                            

Freight wagons, including low-deck vehicles designed for the entire network and vehicles designed to carry lorries                            

Freight wagons are not in the scope of this TSI; they are covered by the ‘freight wagons’ TSI even when they are included in a passenger train (the train composition is in this case an operational issue).                            

Vehicles intended to carry road motor vehicles (with persons on-board these road motor vehicles) are not in the scope of this                                 TSI.                            

Special vehicles, such as on-track machines                            

This type of rolling stock is in the scope of the TSI only when:                            

It is running on its own rail wheels; and                                     

It is designed and intended to be detected by a track based train detection system for traffic management; and                                     

In case of OTMs, it is in transport (running) configuration, self-propelled or hauled.                                     

Exclusion from the scope of this TSI:                            

In case of OTMs, working configuration is outside the scope of this TSI.]                            

##### 2.3.2.*Track gauge*U.K.

This TSI is applicable to rolling stock which is intended to be operated on networks of track gauge 1 435 mm, or on one of                     the following nominal track gauges: 1 520 mm, 1 524 mm system, 1 600 mm system and 1 668 mm system.                  

##### 2.3.3.*Maximum speed*U.K.

Considering the integrated railway system composed of several subsystems (in particular fixed installations; see Section 2.1),                     the maximum design speed of rolling stock is deemed to be lower or equal to 350 km/h.                  

In case of maximum design speed higher than 350 km/h, this technical specification applies, but has to be complemented for                     the speed range above 350 km/h (or maximum speed related to a particular parameter, where specified in the relevant point                     of Section 4.2 up to the maximum design speed, by application of the procedure for innovative solutions described in Article                     10.                  

### 3.ESSENTIAL REQUIREMENTSU.K.

#### [F13.1.**Elements of the rolling stock subsystem corresponding to the essential requirements**U.K.

The following table indicates the essential requirements, as set out and numbered in Annex III of Directive (EU) 2016/797,                        taken into account by the specifications set out in Chapter 4 of this TSI.                   

##### *Rolling stock elements corresponding to essential requirements*U.K.

*Note*: only points in section 4.2 which contain requirements are listed.U.K.                  

#### 3.2.**Essential requirements not covered by this TSI**U.K.

Some of the essential requirements classified as ‘general requirements’ or ‘specific to other subsystems’ in [F1Annex III to Directive (EU) 2016/797] have an impact on the rolling stock subsystem; those that are not covered, or are covered with limitations within the scope                     of this TSI, are identified below                  

##### 3.2.1.*General requirements, requirements related to maintenance and operation*U.K.

The numbering of the paragraphs and the essential requirements hereunder are those set out in Annex III to Directive 2008/57/EC.

The essential requirements that are not covered within the scope of this TSI are the following:

###### 1.4.**Environmental protection**U.K.

###### 1.4.1.*‘The environmental impact of establishment and operation of the rail system must be assessed and taken into account at the                           design stage of the system in accordance with the Community provisions in force.’*U.K.

This essential requirement is covered by the relevant European provisions in force.

###### 1.4.3.*‘The rolling stock and energy-supply systems must be designed and manufactured in such a way as to be electromagnetically                           compatible with the installations, equipment and public or private networks with which they might interfere.’*U.K.

This essential requirement is covered by the relevant European provisions in force.

###### 1.4.4.*‘Operation of the rail system must respect existing regulations on noise pollution.’*U.K.

This essential requirement is covered by the relevant European provisions in force (in particular Noise TSI, and HS RST TSI                     2008 until all rolling stock are covered by the Noise TSI).                  

###### 1.4.5.*‘Operation of the rail system must not give rise to an inadmissible level of ground vibrations for the activities and areas                           close to the infrastructure and in a normal state of maintenance.’*U.K.

This essential requirement is in the scope of the Infrastructure.

###### 2.5**Maintenance**U.K.

These essential requirements are relevant within the scope of this TSI according to Section 3.1 of this TSI only for the technical                     maintenance documentation related to the rolling stock subsystem; they are not covered within the scope of this TSI regarding                     maintenance installations.                  

###### 2.6**Operation**U.K.

These essential requirements are relevant within the scope of this TSI according to Section 3.1 of this TSI for the operating                     documentation related to the rolling stock subsystem (essential requirements 2.6.1 and 2.6.2), and for technical compatibility                     of the rolling stock with operating rules (essential requirements 2.6.3).                  

##### 3.2.2.*Requirements specific to other subsystems*U.K.

Requirements on the relevant other sub-systems are necessary to fulfil these essential requirements for the whole railway                     system.                  

The requirements on the rolling stock subsystem which contribute to the fulfilment of these essential requirements are mentioned                     in the Section 3.1 of this TSI; corresponding essential requirements are those set out in Sections 2.2.3 and 2.3.2 of Annex                     III to Directive 2008/57/EC.                  

Other essential requirements are not covered within the scope of this TSI.

### 4.CHARACTERISATION OF THE ROLLING STOCK SUBSYSTEMU.K.

#### 4.1.**Introduction**U.K.

##### 4.1.1.*General*U.K.

The Union's rail system, to which [F1Directive (EU) 2016/797] applies and of which the rolling stock subsystem is a part, is an integrated system whose consistency needs to be verified.                              This consistency must be checked in particular with regard to the specifications of the rolling stock subsystem, its interfaces                              with the other subsystems of the Union's rail system in which it is integrated, as well as the operating and maintenance rules.                           

The basic parameters of the rolling stock sub-system are defined in the present Chapter 4 of this TSI.

Except where this is strictly necessary for the interoperability of the Union's rail system, the functional and technical                              specifications of the subsystem and its interfaces described in Sections 4.2 and 4.3, do not impose the use of specific technologies                              or technical solutions.                           

Some of the rolling stock characteristics that are mandated to be recorded in the ‘European register of authorised types of                              vehicles’ (according to the relevant Commission Decision) are described in Sections 4.2 and 6.2 of this TSI. Additionally,                              these characteristics are required to be provided in the rolling stock technical documentation described in point 4.2.12 of                              this TSI.                           

##### 4.1.2.*Description of the Rolling stock subject to the application of this TSI*U.K.

Rolling stock subject to the application of this TSI (designated as a unit in the context of this TSI) shall be described                              in the certificate of ‘EC’ verification, using one of the following characteristics:                           
                -  Trainset in fixed formation and, when required, predefined formation(s) of several trainsets of the type under assessment                                    for multiple operation.                                  
                -  Single vehicle or fixed rakes of vehicles intended for predefined formation(s). 
                -  Single vehicle or fixed rakes of vehicles intended for general operation and when required, predefined formation(s) of several                                    vehicles (locomotives) of the type under assessment for multiple operation.                                  

*Note:* Multiple operation of the unit under assessment with other types of rolling stock is not in the scope of this TSI.U.K.                           

Definitions related to train formation and units are given in Section 2.2 of this TSI.

When a unit intended for use in fixed or predefined formation(s) is assessed, the formation(s) for which such assessment is                              valid shall be defined by the party asking for assessment, and stated in the certificate of ‘EC’ verification. The definition                              of each formation shall include the type designation of each vehicle (or of vehicle bodies and wheelsets in case of articulated                              fixed formation), and their arrangement in the formation. Additional details are given in clauses 6.2.8 and 9.                           

Some characteristics or some assessments of a unit intended to be used in general operation, will require defined limits regarding                              the train formations. These limits are laid down in Section 4.2 and in clause 6.2.7.                           

##### 4.1.3.*Main categorisation of the rolling stock for application of TSI requirements*U.K.

A rolling stock technical categorisation system is used in the following clauses of this TSI to define relevant requirements                              applicable to a unit.                           

The technical category(ies) relevant for the unit subject to the application of this TSI shall be identified by the party                              asking for assessment. This categorisation shall be used by the notified body in charge of the assessment, in order to assess                              the applicable requirements from this TSI, and shall be stated in the certificate of ‘EC’ verification.                           

The technical categories of rolling stock are the following:
                -  Unit designed to carry passengers 
                -  Unit designed to carry passenger-related load (luggage, cars, etc.) 
                -  Unit designed to carry other payload (mail, freight, etc.) in self-propelling trains 
                -  Unit fitted with a driver's cab 
                -  Unit fitted with traction equipment 
                -  Electric unit, defined as a unit supplied with electric energy by electrification system(s) specified in the Energy TSI. 
                -  Thermal traction unit 
                -  Freight locomotive: Unit designed to haul freight wagons 
                -  Passenger locomotive: Unit designed to haul passenger carriages 
                -  OTMs 
                -  Infrastructure inspection vehicles. 

A unit is characterised by one or several of the categories above.

Unless stated otherwise in the clauses of Section 4.2, requirements specified in this TSI apply to all technical categories                              of rolling stock defined above.                           

The unit operational configuration shall also be considered when it is assessed; a distinction shall be made between:
                -  A unit that can be operated as a train. 
                -  A unit that cannot be operated alone, and that has to be coupled with other unit(s) to be operated as a train (see also clauses                                    4.1.2, 6.2.7 and 6.2.8).                                  

The maximum design speed of the unit subject to the application of this TSI shall be declared by the party asking for assessment;                              it shall be a multiple of 5 km/h (see also clause 4.2.8.1.2) when its value is higher than 60 km/h; it shall be used by the                              notified body in charge of the assessment, in order to assess the applicable requirements from this TSI, and shall be stated                              in the certificate of ‘EC’ verification.                           

##### 4.1.4.*Categorisation of the rolling stock for fire safety*U.K.

In respect of fire safety requirements, four categories of rolling stock are defined and specified in the TSI SRT.
                -  Category A passenger rolling stock (including passenger locomotive), 
                -  Category B passenger rolling stock (including passenger locomotive), 
                -  Freight locomotive, and self-propelling unit designed to carry other payload than passengers (mail, freight, infrastructure                                    inspection vehicle, etc.),                                  
                -  OTMs. 

The compatibility between the category of the unit and its operation in tunnels is set out in the TSI SRT.

For units designed to carry passengers or haul passenger carriages, and subject to the application of this TSI, category A                              is the minimum category to be selected by the party asking for assessment; the criteria for selecting category B are given                              in the TSI SRT.                           

This categorisation shall be used by the notified body in charge of the assessment, in order to assess the applicable requirements                              from the clause 4.2.10 of this TSI, and shall be stated in the certificate of ‘EC’ verification.                           

#### 4.2.**Functional and technical specification of the sub-system**U.K.

##### 4.2.1.*General*U.K.

###### 4.2.1.1.*Breakdown*U.K.

The functional and technical specifications of the rolling stock subsystem are grouped and sorted out in the following clauses                              of this section:                           
                -  Structures and mechanical parts 
                -  Track interaction and gauging 
                -  Braking 
                -  Passenger related items 
                -  Environmental conditions 
                -  External lights & audible and visible warning devices 
                -  Traction and electrical equipment 
                -  Driver's cab and driver-machine interface 
                -  Fire safety and evacuation 
                -  Servicing 
                -  Documentation for operation and maintenance 

For particular technical aspects specified in Chapters 4, 5 and 6, the functional and technical specification makes an explicit                              reference to a clause of an EN standard or other technical document, as allowed by [F1Article 4(8) of Directive (EU) 2016/797]; these references are listed in the Appendix J of this TSI.                           

Information needed on board for the train staff to be aware of the operational state of the train (normal state, equipment                              out of order, degraded situation ...) are described in the clause dealing with the relevant function, and in clause 4.2.12 ‘documentation                              for the operation and maintenance’.                           

###### 4.2.1.2.*Open points*U.K.

When, for a particular technical aspect, the functional and technical specification necessary to meet the essential requirements                              has not been yet developed, and therefore is not included in this TSI, this aspect is identified as an open point in the relevant                              clause; Appendix I of this TSI lists all open points, as required in [F1Article 4(6) of Directive (EU) 2016/797].                           

The Appendix I mentions also if the open points relate to technical compatibility with the network; for this purpose, the                              Appendix I is split in 2 parts:                           
                -  Open points that relate to technical compatibility between the vehicle and the network. 
                -  Open points that do not relate to technical compatibility between the vehicle and the network. 

As required in [F1Articles 4(6) and 13(2) of Directive (EU) 2016/797], open points shall be addressed by the application of national technical rules.                           

###### 4.2.1.3.*Safety aspects*U.K.

The functions that are essential to safety are identified in Section 3.1 of this TSI by their link to the essential requirements                              ‘safety’.                           

Safety requirements related to these functions are covered by the technical specifications expressed in the corresponding                              clause of Section 4.2 (e.g. ‘passive safety’, ‘wheels’, etc.).                           

Where these technical specifications need to be complemented by requirements expressed in terms of safety requirements (severity                              level), they are also specified in the corresponding clause of Section 4.2.                           

Electronic devices and software, which are used to fulfil functions essential to safety shall be developed and assessed according                              to a methodology adequate for safety related electronic devices and software.                           

##### 4.2.2.*Structure and mechanical parts*U.K.

###### 4.2.2.1.*General*U.K.

This part addresses requirements relating to the design of vehicle structural body (strength of vehicle structure) and of                              the mechanical links (mechanical interfaces) between vehicles or between units.                           

Most of these requirements aim at ensuring the train's mechanical integrity in operation and rescue operation as well as protecting                              passenger and staff compartments in the event of collision or derailment.                           

###### 4.2.2.2.*Mechanical interfaces*U.K.

###### 4.2.2.2.1.General and definitionsU.K.

In order to form a train (as defined in Section 2.2) vehicles are coupled together in a way that enables them to be operated                     together. The coupling is the mechanical interface that enables this. There are several types of couplings:                  

‘Inner’ coupling (also called ‘intermediate’ coupling) is the coupling device between vehicles in order to form a unit composed                              of several vehicles (e.g. a fixed rake of coaches or a trainset)                           

‘End coupling’ (‘external’ coupling) of units is the coupling device used to couple together two (or several) units to form                              a train. An end coupling can be ‘automatic’, ‘semi-automatic’ or ‘manual’. An end coupling can be used for rescue purpose                              (see clause 4.2.2.2.4). In the context of this TSI, a ‘Manual’ coupling is an end coupling system which requires (one or several)                              person(s) to stand between the units to be coupled or uncoupled for the mechanical coupling of these units.                           

‘Rescue coupling’ is the coupling device that enables a unit to be rescued by a recovery power unit equipped with a ‘standard’                              manual coupling as per clause 4.2.2.2.3 where the unit to be rescued is equipped with a different coupling system or is not                              equipped with any coupling system.                           

###### 4.2.2.2.2Inner couplingU.K.

Inner couplings between the different vehicles (fully supported by their own wheels) of a unit shall incorporate a system                              capable of withstanding the forces due to the intended operating conditions.                           

Where the inner coupling system between vehicles has a lower longitudinal strength than the end coupling(s) of the unit, provisions                              shall be made to rescue the unit in case of breakage of any such inner coupling; these provisions shall be described in the                              documentation required in clause 4.2.12.6.                           

In case of articulated units, the joint between two vehicles sharing the same running gear shall comply with the requirements                              of the specification referenced in Appendix J-1, index 1.                           

###### 4.2.2.2.3End couplingU.K.

General Requirements

Requirements on characteristics of end coupling

Where an end coupling is provided at any end of a unit, the following requirements apply to all types of end coupling (automatic,                                                semi-automatic or manual):                                             
                            -  End couplings shall incorporate a resilient coupling system, capable of withstanding the forces due to the intended operational                                                      and rescue conditions.                                                    
                            -  The type of mechanical end coupling together with its nominal maximum design values of tensile and compressive forces and                                                      the height above rail level of its centre line (unit in working order with new wheels) shall be recorded in the technical                                                      documentation described in clause 4.2.12.                                                    

Where there is no coupling at any end of a unit, a device to allow a rescue coupling shall be provided at such end of the                                                unit.                                             

Requirements on type of end coupling

Units assessed in fixed or predefined formation, and of maximum design speed higher or equal to 250 km/h, shall be equipped                                                at each end of the formation with an automatic centre buffer coupler geometrically and functionally compatible with a ‘Type                                                10 latch system automatic centre buffer coupler’ (as defined in clause 5.3.1); the height above rail of its coupling centre                                                line shall be 1 025 mm + 15 mm /– 5 mm (measured with new wheels in load condition ‘design mass in working order’).                                             

Units designed and assessed for general operation and designed to be operated solely on the 1 520 mm system shall be fitted                                                with a centre buffer coupler geometrically and functionally compatible with a ‘SA3 coupling’; the height above rail of its                                                coupling centre line shall be between 980 to 1 080 mm (for all wheel and load conditions).                                             

Requirements on ‘Manual’ coupling system

Provisions to units

The following provisions apply specifically to units fitted with a ‘Manual’ coupling system:
                            -  The coupling system shall be designed so that no human presence between the units to be coupled/uncoupled is required whilst                                                      either one is moving.                                                    
                            -  For units designed and assessed to be operated in ‘general operation’ or in ‘predefined formation’, and fitted with a manual                                                      coupling system, this coupling system shall be of UIC type (as defined in clause 5.3.2).                                                    

These units shall comply with the additional requirements of point (b-2) below.

[F1Compatibility between units                                     

On units equipped with manual coupling system of UIC type (as described in clause 5.3.2) and pneumatic brake system compatible                                          with UIC type (as described in clause 4.2.4.3), the following requirements apply:                                     

The buffers and the screw coupling shall be installed according to clauses 5 and 6 of the specification referenced in Appendix                                                   J-1, index 110.                                              

The dimensions and layout of brake pipes and hoses, couplings and cocks shall meet the requirements set out in clauses 7 and                                                   8 of the specification referenced in Appendix J-1, index 110.]                                              

###### 4.2.2.2.4Rescue couplingU.K.

Provisions shall be made to enable the recovery of the line in case of breakdown by hauling or propelling the unit to be rescued.

Where the unit to be rescued is fitted with an end coupling, rescue shall be possible by means of a power unit equipped with                              the same type of end coupling system (including compatible height above rail level of its centre line).                           

For all units, rescue shall be possible by means of a recovery unit i.e. a power unit featuring at each of its ends intended                              to be used for rescue purposes:                           

On 1 435 mm, 1 524 mm, 1 600 mm or 1 668 mm systems:
                      -  A manual coupling system of UIC type (as described in clauses 4.2.2.2.3 and 5.3.2) and pneumatic brake system of UIC type                                             (as described in clause 4.2.4.3),                                           
                      -  Lateral location of brake pipes and cocks according to the specification referenced in Appendix J-1, index 5, 
                      -  A free space of 395 mm above the centre line of the hook to allow the fitting of the rescue adaptor as described below. 

On 1 520 mm system:
                      -  A centre buffer coupler geometrically and functionally compatible with a ‘SA3 coupling’; the height above rail of its coupling                                             centre line being between 980 to 1 080 mm (for all wheel and load conditions).                                           

This is achieved either by means of a permanently installed compatible coupling system or through a rescue coupler (also called                              rescue adaptor). In the latter case, the unit assessed against this TSI shall be designed so that it is possible to carry                              the rescue coupler on-board.                           

The rescue coupler (as defined in clause 5.3.3) shall comply with the following requirements:
                -  To be designed to allow the rescue at a speed of at least 30 km/h, 
                -  To be secured after mounting onto the recovery unit in a way that prevents it coming off during the rescue operation, 
                -  To withstand the forces due to the intended rescuing conditions, 
                -  To be designed such that it does not require any human presence between the recovery unit and the unit to be rescued whilst                                    either one is moving,                                  
                -  Neither the rescue coupler nor any braking hose shall limit the lateral movement of the hook when fitted onto the recovery                                    unit.                                  

The brake requirement for rescue purpose is covered by the clause 4.2.4.10 of this TSI.

###### 4.2.2.2.5Staff access for coupling and uncouplingU.K.

Units and end coupling-systems shall be designed so that staff is not exposed to undue risk during coupling and uncoupling,                              or rescue operations.                           

To comply with this requirement, units fitted with manual coupling systems of UIC type as per clause 4.2.2.2.3(b) shall comply                              with the following requirements (the ‘Bern rectangle’):                           
                -  On units equipped with screw couplers and side buffers, the space for staff operation shall be in accordance to the specification                                    referenced in Appendix J-1, index 6.                                  
                -  Where a combined automatic and screw coupler is fitted it is permissible for the auto coupler head to infringe the Berne rectangle                                    on the left hand side when it is stowed and the screw coupler is in use.                                  
                -  There shall be a handrail under each buffer. The handrails shall withstand a force of 1,5 kN. 

The operating and rescue documentation specified in clauses 4.2.12.4 and 4.2.12.6 shall describe measures that are necessary                              to meet this requirement. Member States may also require application of those requirements.                           

###### 4.2.2.3.*Gangways*U.K.

Where a gangway is provided as a means for passengers to circulate from one coach or one trainset to another, it shall accommodate                              all relative movements of vehicles in normal operation without exposing passengers to undue risk.                           

Where operation with the gangway not being connected is foreseen, it shall be possible to prevent access by passengers to                              the gangway.                           

Requirements related to the gangway door when the gangway is not in use are specified in clause 4.2.5.7 ‘Passenger-related                              items — Inter-unit doors’.                           

Additional requirements are expressed in the TSI PRM.

These requirements of this clause do not apply to the end of vehicles where this area is not intended for regular use by passengers.

###### 4.2.2.4.*Strength of vehicle structure*U.K.

This clause applies to all units except OTMs.

For OTMs, alternative requirements to those expressed in this clause for static load, category and acceleration are set out                              in Appendix C, clause C.1.                           

The static and dynamic strength (fatigue) of vehicle bodies is relevant to ensure the safety required for the occupants and                              the structural integrity of the vehicles in train and in shunting operations. Therefore, the structure of each vehicle shall                              comply with the requirements of the specification referenced in Appendix J-1, index 7. The rolling stock categories to be                              taken into account shall correspond to category L for locomotives and power head units and categories PI or PII for all other                              types of vehicle within the scope of this TSI, as defined in the specification referenced in Appendix J-1, index 7, clause                              5.2.                           

Proof of the strength of the vehicle body may be demonstrated by calculations and/or by testing, according to the conditions                              set up in the specification referenced in Appendix J-1, index 7, clause 9.2.                           

In case of a unit designed for higher compressive force than those of the categories (required above as a minimum) in the                              specification referenced in Appendix J-1, index 7, this specification does not cover the proposed technical solution; it is                              then permissible to use for compressive force other normative documents that are publicly available.                           

In that case it shall be verified by the notified body that the alternative normative documents form part of a technically                              consistent set of rules applicable to the design, construction and testing of the vehicle structure.                           

The value of compressive force shall be recorded in the technical documentation defined in clause 4.2.12.

The load conditions considered shall be consistent with those defined in clause 4.2.2.10 of this TSI.

The assumptions for aerodynamic loading shall be those described in clause 4.2.6.2.2 of this TSI (passing of 2 trains).

Joining techniques are covered by the above requirements. A verification procedure shall exist to ensure at the production                              phase that defects that may decrease the mechanical characteristics of the structure are controlled.                           

###### 4.2.2.5.*Passive safety*U.K.

The requirements specified in this clause apply to all units, except to units not intended to carry passengers or staff during                              operation and except to OTMs.                           

For units designed to be operated on the 1 520 mm system, the requirements on passive safety described in this clause are                              of voluntary application. If the Applicant chooses to apply the requirements on passive safety described in this clause, this                              shall be recognised by Member States. Member States may also require application of those requirements.                           

For locomotives designed to be operated on the 1 524 mm system, the requirements on passive safety described in this clause                              are of voluntary application. If the Applicant chooses to apply the requirements on passive safety described in this clause,                              this shall be recognised by Member States.                           

Units which cannot operate up to the collision speeds specified under any of the collision scenarios below are exempted from                              the provisions related to that collision scenario.                           

[F1Passive safety is aimed at complementing active safety when all other measures have failed. For this purpose, the mechanical                                 structure of vehicles shall provide protection of the occupants in the event of a collision by providing means of:                            
                -  limiting deceleration                                   
                -  maintaining survival space and structural integrity of the occupied areas                                   
                -  reducing the risk of overriding                                   
                -  reducing the risk of derailment                                   
                -  limiting the consequences of hitting a track obstruction.                                   

To meet these functional requirements, units shall comply with the detailed requirements specified in the specification referenced                                 in Appendix J-1, index 8 related to crashworthiness design category C-I (as per the specification referenced in Appendix J-1,                                 index 8,Table 1 section 5), unless specified otherwise below.                            

The following four reference collision scenarios shall be considered:                            
                -  scenario 1: A front end impact between two identical units,                                   
                -  scenario 2: A front end impact with a freight wagon,                                   
                -  scenario 3: An impact of the unit with a large road vehicle on a level crossing,                                   
                -  scenario 4: An impact of the unit into a low obstacle (e.g. car on a level crossing, animal, rock, etc.).                                   

These scenarios are described in the specification referenced in Appendix J-1, index 8, Table 3 of Section 5.                            

The present TSI specifies crashworthiness requirements applicable within its scope; therefore, the Annex A of the specification                                 referenced in Appendix J-1, index 8 shall not apply. The requirements of the specification referenced in Appendix J-1, index                                 8 Section 6 shall be applied in relation to the above given reference collision scenarios.                            

To limit the consequences of hitting a track obstruction, the leading ends of locomotives, power heads, driving coaches and                                 trainsets shall be equipped with an obstacle deflector. The requirements with which obstacle deflectors shall comply are defined                                 in the specification referenced in Appendix J-1, index 8, Section 6.5.]                            

###### 4.2.2.6.*Lifting and jacking*U.K.

This clause applies to all units.

Additional provisions concerning the lifting and jacking of OTMs are specified in Appendix C, clause C.2.

It shall be possible to safely lift or jack each vehicle composing the unit, for recovery purposes (following derailment or                              other accident or incident), and for maintenance purposes. To this purpose, suitable vehicle body interfaces (lifting/jacking                              points) shall be provided, which permit the application of vertical or quasi-vertical forces. The vehicle shall be designed                              for complete lifting or jacking, including the running gear (e.g. by securing/attaching the bogies to the vehicle body). It                              shall also be possible to lift or jack any end of the vehicle (including its running gear) with the other end resting on the                              remaining running gear(s).                           

It is recommended to design jacking points so that they can be used as lifting points with all the running gears of the vehicle                              linked to the underframe of the vehicle.                           

Jacking/Lifting points shall be located such as to enable the safe and stable lifting of the vehicle; sufficient space shall                              be provided underneath and around each jacking point to allow an easy installation of rescue devices. Jacking/Lifting points                              shall be designed such that staff is not exposed to any undue risk under normal operation or when using the rescue equipment.                           

When the lower structure of the bodyshell does not allow the provision of permanent built-in jacking/lifting points, this                              structure shall be provided with fixtures which permit the fixation of removable jacking/lifting points during the re-railing                              operation.                           

The geometry of permanent built-in jacking/lifting points shall be compliant with the specification referenced in Appendix                              J-1, index 9, clause 5.3; the geometry of removable jacking/lifting points shall be compliant with the specification referenced                              in Appendix J-1, index 9, clause 5.4.                           

Marking of lifting points shall be made by signs compliant with the specification referenced in Appendix J-1, index 10.

The structure shall be designed with consideration of the loads specified in the specification referenced in Appendix J-1,                              index 11, clauses 6.3.2 and 6.3.3; proof of the strength of the vehicle body may be demonstrated by calculations or by testing,                              according to the conditions set up in the specification referenced in Appendix J-1, index 11, clause 9.2.                           

Alternative normative documents may be used under the same conditions as defined in clause 4.2.2.4 above.

For each vehicle of the unit, a jacking and lifting diagram and corresponding instructions shall be provided in the documentation                              as described in clauses 4.2.12.5 and 4.2.12.6 of this TSI. Instructions shall be given as far as feasible by pictograms.                           

###### 4.2.2.7.*Fixing of devices to carbody structure*U.K.

This clause applies to all units, except to OTMs.

Provisions concerning the structural strength of OTMs are specified in Appendix C, clause C.1.

Fixed devices including those inside the passenger areas, shall be attached to the car body structure in a way that prevents                              these fixed devices becoming loose and presenting a risk of passenger injuries or lead to a derailment. To this aim, attachments                              of these devices shall be designed according to the specification referenced in Appendix J-1, index 12, considering category                              L for locomotives and category P-I or P-II for passenger rolling stock.                           

Alternative normative documents may be used under the same conditions as defined in clause 4.2.2.4 above.

###### 4.2.2.8.*Staff and freight Access doors*U.K.

The doors for use of passengers are covered by the clause 4.2.5 of this TSI: ‘Passenger related items’. Cab doors are addressed                              in clause 4.2.9 of this TSI. This clause addresses doors for freight use and for use of train crew other than cab doors.                           

Vehicles fitted with a compartment dedicated to train crew or freight shall be equipped with a device to close and lock the                              doors. The doors shall remain closed and locked until they are intentionally released.                           

###### 4.2.2.9.*Mechanical characteristics of glass (other than windscreens)*U.K.

Where glass is used in glazing (including mirrors), it shall be either laminated or toughened glass which is in accordance                              with one of the relevant publicly available standards suitable for railway application with regard to the quality and area                              of use, thereby minimising the risk to passenger and staff being injured by breaking glass.                           

###### 4.2.2.10.*Load conditions and weighed mass*U.K.

The following load conditions defined in the specification referenced in Appendix J-1, index 13, [F1clause 4.5] shall be determined:                           
                -  Design mass under exceptional payload 
                -  Design mass under normal payload 
                -  Design mass in working order 

The hypothesis taken for arriving at the load conditions above shall be justified and documented in the general documentation                              described in clause 4.2.12.2 of this TSI.                           

These hypothesis shall be based on a rolling stock categorisation (high speed and long distance train, other) and on a payload                              description (passengers, payload per m2 in standing and service areas) consistent with the specification referenced in Appendix J-1, index 13; values for the different                              parameters may deviate from this standard provided that they are justified.                           

For OTMs, different load conditions (minimum mass, maximum mass) may be used, in order to take into account optional on-board                              equipment.                           

The conformity assessment procedure is described in clause 6.2.3.1 of this TSI.

For each load condition defined above, the following information shall be provided in the technical documentation described                              in clause 4.2.12:                           
                -  Total vehicle mass (for each vehicle of the unit) 
                -  Mass per axle (for each axle) 
                -  Mass per wheel (for each wheel). 

*Note:* for units equipped with independently rotating wheels, ‘axle’ shall be interpreted as a geometric notion, and not as a physical                     component; this is valid to the whole TSI, unless stated otherwise.U.K.                  

##### 4.2.3.*Track interaction and gauging*U.K.

###### 4.2.3.1.*Gauging*U.K.

This clause concerns the rules for calculation and verification intended for sizing the rolling stock to run on one or several                              infrastructures without interference risk.                           

**For units designed to be operated on other track gauge(s) than 1 520 mm system:**                   

The applicant shall select the intended reference profile including the reference profile for the lower parts. This reference                              profile shall be recorded in the technical documentation defined in clause 4.2.12 of this TSI.                           

The compliance of a unit with this intended reference profile shall be established by one of the methods set out in the specification                              referenced in Appendix J-1, index 14.                           

During a transitional period ending 3 years after the date of application of this TSI, for technical compatibility with the                              existing national network it is permissible for the reference profile of the unit to alternatively be established in accordance                              with the national technical rules notified for this purpose.                           

This shall not prevent the access of TSI compliant rolling stock to the national network.

In case the unit is declared as compliant with one or several of the reference contours G1, GA, GB, GC or DE3, including those                              related to the lower part GI1, GI2 or GI3, as set out in the specification referenced in Appendix J-1, index 14, compliance                              shall be established by the kinematic method as set out in the specification referenced in Appendix J-1, index 14.                           

The compliance to those reference contour(s) shall be recorded in the technical documentation defined in clause 4.2.12 of                              this TSI.                           

For electric units, the pantograph gauge shall be verified by calculation according to the specification referenced in Appendix                              J-1, index 14, clause A.3.12 to ensure that the pantograph envelope complies with the mechanical kinematic pantograph gauge                              which in itself is determined according to Appendix D of TSI ENE, and depends on the choice made for the pantograph head geometry:                              the two permitted possibilities are defined in clause 4.2.8.2.9.2 of this TSI.                           

The voltage of the power supply is considered in the infrastructure gauge in order to ensure the proper insulation distances                              between the pantograph and fixed installations.                           

The pantograph sway as specified in clause 4.2.10 of TSI ENE and used for the mechanical kinematic gauge calculation shall                              be justified by calculations or measurements as set out in the specification referenced in Appendix J-1, index 14.                           

**For units designed to be operated on track gauge of 1 520 mm system:**                   

The static contour of the vehicle shall be within the ‘T’ uniform vehicle gauge; the reference contour for infrastructure                              is the ‘S’ gauge. This contour is specified in Appendix B.                           

For electric units the pantograph gauge shall be verified by calculation to ensure that the pantograph envelope complies with                              the mechanical static pantograph gauge which is defined in Appendix D of TSI ENE; the choice made for the pantograph head                              geometry shall be taken into account: the permitted possibilities are defined in clause 4.2.8.2.9.2 of this TSI.                           

###### 4.2.3.2.*Axle load and wheel load*U.K.

###### 4.2.3.2.1.Axle load parameterU.K.

The axle load is an interface parameter between the unit and the infrastructure. The axle load is a performance parameter                              of the infrastructure specified in clause 4.2.1 of the INF TSI and depends on the traffic code of the line. It has to be considered                              in combination with the axle spacing, with the train length and with the maximum allowed speed for the unit on the considered                              line.                           

The following characteristics to be used as an interface to the infrastructure shall be part of the general documentation                              produced when the unit is assessed, and described in clause 4.2.12.2 of this TSI:                           
                -  The mass per axle (for each axle) for the three load conditions (as defined and required to be part of the documentation in                                    clause 4.2.2.10 of this TSI).                                  
                -  The position of the axles along the unit (axle spacing). 
                -  The length of the unit. 
                -  The maximum design speed (as required to be part of the documentation in clause 4.2.8.1.2 of this TSI). 

Use of this information at operational level for compatibility check between rolling stock and infrastructure (outside the                              scope of this TSI):                           

The axle load of each individual axle of the unit to be used as interface parameter to the infrastructure has to be defined                              by the railway undertaking as required in clause 4.2.2.5 of the TSI OPE, considering the expected load for the intended service                              (not defined when the unit is assessed). The axle load in load condition ‘design mass under exceptional payload’ represents                              the maximum possible value of the axle load mentioned above. The maximum load considered for the design of the brake system                              defined in clause 4.2.4.5.2 has also to be considered.                           

###### 4.2.3.2.2.Wheel loadU.K.

The ratio of wheel load difference per axle Dqj = (Ql – Qr)/(Ql + Qr), shall be evaluated by wheel load measurement, considering                              the load condition ‘design mass in working order’. Wheel load difference higher than 5 % of the axle load for that wheelset                              are allowed only if demonstrated as acceptable by the test to prove safety against derailment on twisted track specified in                              the clause 4.2.3.4.1 of this TSI.                           

The conformity assessment procedure is described in clause 6.2.3.2 of this TSI.

For units with axle load in design mass under normal payload lower or equal to 22,5 tons and a worn wheel diameter higher                              than or equal to 470 mm, the wheel load over the wheel diameter (Q/D) shall be lower or equal to 0,15 kN/mm, as measured for                              a minimum worn wheel diameter and design mass under normal payload.                           

###### 4.2.3.3.*Rolling Stock parameters which influence ground based systems*U.K.

###### 4.2.3.3.1Rolling Stock characteristics for the compatibility with train detection systemsU.K.

For units designed to be operated on other track gauges than the 1 520 mm system, the set of rolling stock characteristics                              for compatibility with train detection target systems are given in clauses 4.2.3.3.1.1, 4.2.3.3.1.2 and 4.2.3.3.1.3.                           

Reference is made to clauses of the specification referenced in Appendix J-2, index 1 of this TSI (also referenced in Annex                              A, Index 77 of CCS TSI).                           

The set of characteristics the rolling stock is compatible with shall be recorded in the technical documentation described                              in clause 4.2.12 of this TSI.                           

###### 4.2.3.3.1.1Rolling stock characteristics for compatibility with train detection system based on track circuitsU.K.

          -  **Vehicle geometry**                           (1)
The maximum distance between 2 consecutive axles is specified in the specification referenced in Appendix J-2, index 1, clause                                    3.1.2.1. (distance a1 in Figure 1).                                 
(2)
The maximum distance between buffer end and first axle is specified in the specification referenced in Appendix J-2, index                                    1, clauses 3.1.2.5 and 6. (distance b1 in Figure 1).                                 
(3)
The minimum distance between end axles of a unit is specified in the specification referenced in Appendix J-2, index 1, clause                                    3.1.2.4.                                 
 
          -  **Vehicle design**                           (4)
The minimum axle load in all load conditions is specified in the specification referenced in Appendix J-2, index 1, clause                                    3.1.7.                                 
(5)
The electrical resistance between the running surfaces of the opposite wheels of a wheelset is specified in the specification                                    referenced in Appendix J-2, index 1, clause 3.1.9 and the method to measure is specified in the same clause.                                 
(6)
For electric units equipped with a pantograph, the minimum impedance between pantograph and each wheel of the train is specified                                    in the specification referenced in Appendix J-2, index 1, clause 3.2.2.1.                                 
 
          -  **Isolating emissions**                           (7)
The limitations of use of sanding equipment are given in the specification referenced in Appendix J-2, index 1, clause 3.1.4;                                    ‘sand characteristics’ is part of in this specification.                                 

In case where an automatic sanding function is provided, it shall be possible for the driver to suspend its use on particular                                    points of the track identified in operating rules as non-compatible with sanding.                                 
(8)
The limitations of use of composite brake blocks are given in the specification referenced in Appendix J-2, index 1, clause                                    3.1.6.                                 
 
          -  **EMC**                           (9)
The requirements related to electromagnetic compatibility are specified in the specification referenced in Appendix J-2, index                                    1, clauses 3.2.1.and 3.2.2.                                 
(10)
The electromagnetic interference limit levels rising from traction currents are specified in the specification referenced                                    in Appendix J-2, index 1, clause 3.2.2.                                 
 

###### 4.2.3.3.1.2Rolling stock characteristics for compatibility with train detection system based on axle countersU.K.

          -  **Vehicle geometry**                           (1)
The maximum distance between 2 consecutive axles is specified in the specification referenced in Appendix J-2, index 1, clause                                    3.1.2.1.                                 
(2)
The minimum distance between 2 consecutive axles of the train is specified in the specification referenced in Appendix J-2,                                    index 1, clause 3.1.2.2.                                 
(3)
At the end of a unit intended to be coupled, the minimum distance between end and first axle of the unit is half of the value                                    specified in the specification referenced in Appendix J-2, index 1, clause 3.1.2.2.                                 
(4)
The maximum distance between end and first axle is specified in the specification referenced in Appendix J-2, index 1, clause                                    3.1.2.5 & 6 (distance b1 in Figure 1).                                 
 
          -  **Wheel geometry**                           (5)
Wheel geometry is specified in the clause 4.2.3.5.2.2 of the present TSI.
(6)
The minimum wheel diameter (speed dependant) is specified in the specification referenced in Appendix J-2, index 1, clause                                    3.1.3                                 
 
          -  **Vehicle design**                           (7)
The metal-free space around wheels is specified in the specification referenced in Appendix J-2, index 1, clause 3.1.3.5.
(8)
The characteristics of the wheel material regarding magnetic field is specified in the specification referenced in Appendix                                    J-2, index 1, clause 3.1.3.6.                                 
 
          -  **EMC**                           (9)
The requirements related to electromagnetic compatibility are specified in specification referenced in Appendix J-2, index                                    1, clauses 3.2.1.and 3.2.2.                                 
(10)
The electromagnetic interference limit levels rising from the use of eddy current or magnetic track brakes are specified in                                    the specification referenced in Appendix J-2, index 1, clause 3.2.3.                                 
 

###### 4.2.3.3.1.3Rolling stock characteristics for compatibility with loop equipmentU.K.

          -  **Vehicle design**                           (1)
The vehicle metal construction is specified in the specification referenced in Appendix J-2, index 1, clause 3.1.7.2.
 

###### 4.2.3.3.2Axle bearing condition monitoringU.K.

Axle bearing condition monitoring objective is to detect deficient axle box bearings.

For units of maximum design speed higher than or equal to 250 km/h, on board detection equipment shall be provided.

For units of maximum design speed lower than 250 km/h, and designed to be operated on others track gauge systems than the                              1 520 mm system, axle bearing condition monitoring shall be provided and be achieved either by on board equipment (according                              to specification in clause 4.2.3.3.2.1) or by using track side equipment (according to specification in clause 4.2.3.3.2.2).                           

The fitment of on board system or/and the compatibility with track side equipment shall be recorded in the technical documentation                              described in clause 4.2.12 of this TSI.                           

###### 4.2.3.3.2.1.Requirements applicable to on board detection equipmentU.K.

This equipment shall be able to detect a deterioration of any of the axle box bearings of the unit.

The bearing condition shall be evaluated either by monitoring its temperature, or its dynamic frequencies or some other suitable                              bearing condition characteristic.                           

The detection system shall be located entirely on board the unit, and diagnosis messages shall be made available on board.

The diagnosis messages delivered shall be described, and shall be taken into account in the operating documentation described                              in clause 4.2.12.4 of this TSI, and in the maintenance documentation described in clause 4.2.12.3 of this TSI.                           

###### 4.2.3.3.2.2.Rolling stock requirements for compatibility with trackside equipmentU.K.

For units designed to be operated on the 1 435 mm system, the zone visible to the trackside equipment on rolling stock shall                              be the area as defined in the specification referenced in Appendix J-1, index 15.                           

[F1For units designed to be operated on other track gauges than 1 435 mm or 1 668 mm a specific case is declared where relevant (harmonised rule available for the concerned network).]                            

[F2For units designed to be operated on the 1 668 mm system, the zone visible to the trackside equipment on rolling stock shall be the area as defines in Table 1 referring                                 to the parameters of the specification referenced in Appendix J-1, index 15.                            

###### *Table 1*

**Target and prohibitive zone for units intended to be operated on 1 668 mm networks**

###### 4.2.3.4.*Rolling stock dynamic behaviour*U.K.

###### 4.2.3.4.1.Safety against derailment running on twisted trackU.K.

The unit shall be designed to ensure safe running on twisted track, taking into account specifically the transition phase                              between canted and level track and cross level deviations.                           

The conformity assessment procedure is described in clause 6.2.3.3 of this TSI.

This conformity assessment procedure is applicable for axle loads in the range of those mentioned in the clause 4.2.1 of the                     TSI INF and in the specification referenced in Annex J-1, index 16.                  

It is not applicable to vehicle designed for higher axle load, such cases may be covered by national rules or by the procedure                     for innovative solution described in article 10 and Chapter 6 of this TSI.                  

###### 4.2.3.4.2.Running dynamic behaviourU.K.

This clause is applicable to units designed for a speed higher than 60 km/h, except to on-track machines for which the requirements                              are set out in Appendix C, clause C.3 and except units designed to be operated on the 1 520 mm track gauge for which the corresponding                              requirements are considered as ‘open point’.                           

The dynamic behaviour of a vehicle has a strong influence on running safety and track loading. It is an essential function                              for safety, covered by the requirements of this clause.                           

###### (a)Technical requirementsU.K.

[F1The unit shall run safely and produce an acceptable level of track loading when operated within the limits defined by the                                 combination(s) of speed and cant deficiency under the conditions set out in the specification referenced in Appendix J-1,                                 index 16.                            

This shall be assessed by verifying that limit values specified below in clauses 4.2.3.4.2.1 and 4.2.3.4.2.2 of this TSI are                                 respected; the conformity assessment procedure is described in clause 6.2.3.4 of this TSI.]                            

The limit values and conformity assessment mentioned in point 3 are applicable for axle loads in the range of those mentioned                              in the clause 4.2.1 of the TSI INF and in the specification referenced in Annex J-1, index 16.                           

They are not applicable to vehicles designed for higher axle load, as harmonised track loading limit values are not defined;                              such cases may be covered by national rules or by the procedure for innovative solution described in article 10 and Chapter                              6 of this TSI.                           

[F1The running dynamic behaviour test report (including limits of use and track loading parameters) shall be stated in the technical                                 documentation described in clause 4.2.12 of this TSI.                            

Track loading parameters (including the additional ones Ymax, Bmax and the Bqst where relevant) to be recorded are defined                                 in the specification referenced in Appendix J-1, index 16.]                            

###### (b)Additional requirements when an active system is usedU.K.

When active systems (based on software or programmable controller controlling actuators) are used, the functional failure                              has typical credible potential to lead directly to ‘fatalities’ for both of the following scenarios:                           

failure in the active system leading to a non-compliance with limit values for running safety (defined in accordance with                                       clauses 4.2.3.4.2.1 and 4.2.3.4.2.2);                                    

failure in the active system leading to a vehicle outside of the kinematic reference contour of the carbody and pantograph,                                       due to tilting angle (sway) leading to non-compliance with the values assumed as set out in clause 4.2.3.1.                                    

Considering this severity of the failure consequence it shall be demonstrated that the risk is controlled to an acceptable                              level.                           

The demonstration of compliance (conformity assessment procedure) is described in clause 6.2.3.5 of this TSI.

###### (c)Additional requirements when an instability detection system is installed (option)U.K.

The instability detection system shall provide information regarding the need to take operative measures (such as reduction                              of speed etc.), and it shall be described in the technical documentation. The operative measures shall be described in the                              operating documentation set out in clause 4.2.12.4 of this TSI.                           

###### 4.2.3.4.2.1.Limit values for running safetyU.K.

[F1The limit values for running safety which the unit shall meet are specified in the specification referenced in Appendix J-1,                                 index 17.]                            

###### 4.2.3.4.2.2.Track loading limit valuesU.K.

[F1The limit values for track loading which the unit shall meet (when assessing with the normal method) are specified in the                                 specification referenced in Appendix J-1, index 19.]                            

In case the estimated values exceed the limit values expressed above, the operational conditions for the rolling stock (e.g.                              maximum speed, cant deficiency) may be adjusted taking into account track characteristics (e.g. curve radius, cross section                              of the rail, sleeper spacing, track maintenance intervals).                           

###### 4.2.3.4.3.Equivalent conicityU.K.

###### 4.2.3.4.3.1.Design values for new wheel profilesU.K.

The clause 4.2.3.4.3 is applicable to all units, except for unit designed to be operated on the 1 520 mm or 1 600 mm track                              gauge for which the corresponding requirements are an open point.                           

A new wheel profile and the distance between active faces of the wheels shall be checked in respect of target equivalent conicities                              using the calculation scenarios provided in clause 6.2.3.6 of this TSI in order to establish the suitability of the new proposed                              wheel profile for infrastructure in accordance with the TSI INF.                           

Units equipped with independently rotating wheels are exempt from these requirements.

###### 4.2.3.4.3.2In-service values of wheelset equivalent conicityU.K.

The combined equivalent conicities the vehicle is designed for, as verified by the demonstration of conformity of the running                              dynamic behaviour specified in clause 6.2.3.4 of this TSI, shall be specified for in-service conditions in the maintenance                              documentation as set out in point 4.2.12.3.2, taking into account the contributions of wheel and rail profiles.                           

If ride instability is reported, the railway undertaking and the Infrastructure Manager shall localise the section of the                              line in a joint investigation.                           

The railway undertaking shall measure the wheel profiles and the front-to-front distance (distance of active faces) of the                              wheelsets in question. The equivalent conicity shall be calculated using the calculation scenarios provided in clause 6.2.3.6                              in order to check if compliance with the maximum equivalent conicity the vehicle was designed and tested for is met. If it                              is not the case, the wheel profiles have to be corrected.                           

If the wheelset conicity complies with the maximum equivalent conicity the vehicle was designed and tested for, a joint investigation                              by the railway undertaking and the infrastructure manager shall be undertaken to determine the characteristics reason for                              the instability.                           

Units equipped with independently rotating wheels are exempt from these requirements.

###### 4.2.3.5.*Running gear*U.K.

###### 4.2.3.5.1.Structural design of bogie frameU.K.

For units which include a bogie frame, the integrity of the structure of the bogie frame, axle box housing and all attached                              equipment shall be demonstrated based on methods as set out in the specification referenced in Appendix J-1, index 20.                           

The body to bogie connection shall comply with the requirements of the specification referenced in Appendix J-1, index 21.

The hypothesis taken to evaluate the loads due to bogie running (formulas and coefficients) in line with the specification                              referenced in Appendix J-1, index 20 shall be justified and documented in the technical documentation described in clause 4.2.12                              of this TSI.                           

###### 4.2.3.5.2.WheelsetsU.K.

For the purpose of this TSI, wheelsets are defined to include main parts ensuring the mechanical interface with the track                              (wheels and connecting elements: e.g. transverse axle, independent wheel axle) and accessories parts (axle bearings, axle                              boxes, gearboxes and brake discs).                           

The wheelset shall be designed and manufactured with a consistent methodology using a set of load cases consistent with load                              conditions defined in clause 4.2.2.10 of this TSI.                           

###### 4.2.3.5.2.1.Mechanical and geometric characteristics of wheelsetsU.K.

###### **Mechanical behaviour of wheelsets**U.K.

The mechanical characteristics of the wheelsets shall ensure the safe movement of rolling stock.

The mechanical characteristics cover:
                -  assembly 
                -  mechanical resistance and fatigue characteristics 

The conformity assessment procedure is described in clause 6.2.3.7 of this TSI.

###### **Mechanical behaviour of axles**U.K.

The characteristics of the axle shall ensure the transmission of forces and torque.

The conformity assessment procedure is described in clause 6.2.3.7 of this TSI.

###### **Case of units equipped with independently rotating wheels**U.K.

The characteristics of the end of axle (interface between wheel and running gear) shall ensure the transmission of forces                              and torque.                           

The conformity assessment procedure shall be in accordance with point (7) of clause 6.2.3.7 of this TSI.

###### **Mechanical behaviour of the axle boxes**U.K.

The axle box shall be designed with consideration of mechanical resistance and fatigue characteristics.

The conformity assessment procedure is described in clause 6.2.3.7 of this TSI.

Temperature limits shall be defined by testing and recorded in the technical documentation described in clause 4.2.12 of this                              TSI.                           

Axle bearing condition monitoring is defined in clause 4.2.3.3.2 of this TSI.

###### **Geometrical dimensions of wheelsets**U.K.

The geometric dimensions of the wheelsets (as defined in Figure 1) shall be compliant with limit values specified in Table                              1 for the relevant track gauge.                           

These limit values shall be taken as design values (new wheelset) and as in-service limit values (to be used for maintenance                              purposes; see also clause 4.5 of this TSI).                           

###### *Table 1*

**In-service limits of the geometric dimensions of wheelsets**

The dimension AR is measured at the height of the top of rail. The dimensions AR and SR shall be complied with in laden and tare conditions. Smaller tolerances within the above limits may be specified by the manufacturer                              in the maintenance documentation for in-service values. The dimensions SR is measured at 10 mm above tread datum (as shown in Figure 2).                           

*Figure 1*

**Symbols for wheelsets**

###### 4.2.3.5.2.2Mechanical and geometrical characteristics of wheelsU.K.

###### **Mechanical behaviour of wheels**U.K.

The characteristics of the wheels shall ensure the safe movement of rolling stock and contribute to the guidance of the rolling                              stock.                           

The conformity assessment procedure is described in clause 6.1.3.1 of this TSI.

###### **Geometrical dimensions of wheels**U.K.

The geometrical dimensions of the wheels (as defined in Figure 2) shall be compliant with limit values specified in Table                              2. These limit values shall be taken as design values (new wheel) and as in-service limit values (to be used for maintenance                              purposes; see also clause 4.5).                           

###### *Table 2*

**In-service limits of the geometric dimensions of wheel**

*Figure 2*

**Symbols for wheels**

Units equipped with independently rotating wheels shall, in addition to the requirements in this clause dealing with wheels,                              meet the requirements in this TSI for geometrical characteristics of wheelsets defined in clause 4.2.3.5.2.1.                           

###### F34.2.3.5.2.3Variable gauge wheelsetsU.K.

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Textual Amendments

F3Deleted by Commission Implementing Regulation (EU) 2019/776 of 16 May 2019 amending Commission Regulations (EU) No 321/2013, (EU) No                                 1299/2014, (EU) No 1301/2014, (EU) No 1302/2014, (EU) No 1303/2014 and (EU) 2016/919 and Commission Implementing Decision                                 2011/665/EU as regards the alignment with Directive (EU) 2016/797 of the European Parliament and of the Council and the implementation                                 of specific objectives set out in Commission Delegated Decision (EU) 2017/1474 (Text with EEA relevance).

###### [F24.2.3.5.3.**Automatic variable gauge systems**U.K.

###### (1)This requirement is applicable to units equipped with an automatic variable gauge system with changeover mechanism of the                           axial position of the wheels allowing the unit to be compatible with 1 435 mm track gauge and other track gauge(s) within the scope of this TSI by means of passage through a track gauge changeover                           facility.U.K.

###### (2)The changeover mechanism shall ensure the locking in the correct intended axial position of the wheel.U.K.

###### (3)After passage through the track gauge changeover facility, the verification of the state of the locking system (locked or                           unlocked) and of the position of the wheels shall be performed by one or more of the following means: visual control, on-board                           control system or infrastructure/facility control system. In case of on-board control system, a continuous monitoring shall                           be possible.U.K.

###### (4)If a running gear is equipped with brake equipment subject to a change in position during the gauge change operation, the                           automatic variable gauge system shall ensure the position and safe locking in the correct position of this equipment simultaneously                           to those of the wheels.U.K.

###### (5)The failure of the locking of the position of the wheels and braking equipment (if relevant) during operation has typical                           credible potential to lead directly to a catastrophic accident (resulting in multiple fatalities); considering this severity                           of the failure consequence, it shall be demonstrated that the risk is controlled to an acceptable level.U.K.

###### (6)The automatic variable gauge system is defined as an interoperable constituent (clause 5.3.4b). The conformity assessment                           procedure is specified in clause 6.1.3.1a (IC level), in clause 6.2.3.5 (safety requirement) and in clause 6.2.3.7b (subsystem                           level) of this TSI.U.K.

###### (7)The track gauges the unit is compatible with shall be recorded in the technical documentation. A description of the changeover                           operation in normal mode, including the type(s) of track gauge changeover facility(ies) the unit is compatible with, shall                           be part of the technical documentation (see also clause 4.2.12.4 (1) of this TSI).U.K.

###### (8)The requirements and conformity assessments required in other sections of this TSI apply independently for each wheel position                           corresponding to one track gauge, and have to be documented accordingly.]U.K.

###### 4.2.3.6.*Minimum curve radius*U.K.

The minimum curve radius to be negotiated shall be 150 m for all units.

###### 4.2.3.7.*Life guards*U.K.

This requirement applies to units fitted with a driving cab.

The wheels shall be protected against damages caused by minor items on the rails. This requirement can be met by life guards                              in front of the wheels of the leading axle.                           

The height of the lower end of the life guard above the plain rail shall be:
                -  30 mm minimum in all conditions 
                -  130 mm maximum in all conditions 

taking into account in particular wheel wear and suspension compression.

If an obstacle deflector specified in clause 4.2.2.5 has its lower edge at less than 130 mm above the plain rail in all conditions,                              it fulfils the functional requirement of the life guards and therefore it is permissible not to fit life guards.                           

A life guard shall be designed to withstand a minimum longitudinal static force without permanent deformation of 20 kN. This                              requirement shall be verified by a calculation.                           

A life guard shall be designed so that, during plastic deformation, it does not foul the track or running gear and that contact                              with the wheel tread, if it occurs, does not pose a risk of derailment.                           

##### 4.2.4.*Braking*U.K.

###### 4.2.4.1.*General*U.K.

The purpose of the train braking system is to ensure that the train's speed can be reduced or maintained on a slope, or that                              the train can be stopped within the maximum allowable braking distance. Braking also ensures the immobilisation of a train.                           

The primary factors that influence the braking performance are the braking power (braking force production), the train mass,                              the train rolling resistance, the speed, the available adhesion.                           

Individual unit performance for units operated in various train formations is defined so that the overall braking performance                              of the train can be derived.                           

The braking performance is determined by deceleration profiles (deceleration = F(speed) and equivalent response time).

Stopping distance, brake weight percentage (also called ‘lambda’ or ‘braked mass percentage’), braked mass may also be used,                              and can be derived (directly or via stopping distance) from deceleration profiles by a calculation.                           

The braking performance could vary with the mass of the train or vehicle.

The minimum train braking performance required to operate a train on a line at an intended speed is dependent on the line                              characteristics (signalling system, maximum speed, gradients, line safety margin) and is a characteristic of the infrastructure.                           

The train or vehicle main data characterising the braking performance is defined in the clause 4.2.4.5 of this TSI.

###### 4.2.4.2.*Main functional and safety requirements*U.K.

###### 4.2.4.2.1.Functional requirementsU.K.

The following requirements apply to all units.

Units shall be equipped with:

a main brake function used during operation for service and emergency braking.

a parking brake function used when the train is parked, allowing the application of a brake force without any available energy                              on board for an unlimited period of time.                           

The main brake function of a train shall be:

continuous: the brake application signal is transmitted from a central command to the whole train by a control line.

automatic: an inadvertent disruption (loss of integrity, line de-energised, etc.) of the control line leads to brake activation                              on all vehicles of the train.                           

It is permitted to complement the main brake function by additional brake systems described in clause 4.2.4.7 (dynamic brake                              — braking system linked to traction system) and/or clause 4.2.4.8 (braking system independent of adhesion conditions).                           

The dissipation of the braking energy shall be considered in the design of the braking system, and shall not cause any damage                              to the components of the braking system in normal operation conditions; this shall be verified by a calculation as specified                              in clause 4.2.4.5.4 of this TSI.                           

The temperature reached around the brake components shall also be considered in the design of the rolling stock.

The design of the brake system shall include means for monitoring and tests as specified in clause 4.2.4.9 of this TSI.

The requirements below in this clause 4.2.4.2.1 apply at train level to units for which the operating formation(s) is (are)                              defined at design stage (i.e. unit assessed in fixed formation, unit assessed in predefined formation(s), locomotive operated                              alone).                           

The braking performance shall be consistent with safety requirements expressed in clause 4.2.4.2.2 in case of inadvertent                              disruption of the brake control line, and in the event of the braking energy supply being disrupted, the power supply failing                              or other energy source failure.                           

In particular, there shall be sufficient braking energy available on board the train (stored energy), distributed along the                              train consistent with the design of the brake system, to ensure the application of the required brake forces.                           

Successive applications and releases of the brake shall be considered in the design of the braking system (inexhaustibility).

In case of unintentional train separation, the two parts of the train shall be brought to a standstill; the braking performances                              on the two parts of the train are not required to be identical to the braking performance in normal mode.                           

In the event of the braking energy supply being disrupted or the power supply failing, it shall be possible to hold in a stationary                              position a unit with maximum braking load (as defined in clause 4.2.4.5.2) on a 40 ‰ gradient by using the friction brake                              of the main brake system alone, for at least two hours.                           

The unit braking control system shall have three control modes:

:

application of a predefined brake force in a predefined maximum response time in order to stop the train with a defined level                                 of brake performance.                              

:

application of an adjustable brake force in order to control the speed of the train, including stop and temporary immobilisation.

:

application of a brake force to maintain the train (or the vehicle) in permanent immobilisation in a stationary position,                                 without any available energy on board.                              

A brake application command, whatever its control mode, shall take control of the brake system, even in case of active brake                              release command; this requirement is permitted not to apply when intentional suppression of the brake application command                              is given by the driver (e.g. passenger alarm override, uncoupling...).                           

For speeds higher than 5 km/h, the maximum jerk due to the use of brakes shall be lower than 4 m/s3. The jerk behaviour may                              be derived from the calculation and from the evaluation of the deceleration behaviour as measured during the brake tests (as                              described in the clauses 6.2.3.8 and 6.2.3.9).                           

###### 4.2.4.2.2.Safety requirementsU.K.

The braking system is the means to stop a train, and therefore contributes to the safety level of the railway system.

The functional requirements expressed in clause 4.2.4.2.1 contribute to ensure safe functioning of the braking system; nevertheless,                              a risk based analysis is necessary to evaluate the braking performance, as many components are involved.                           

For the hazardous scenarios considered, the corresponding safety requirements shall be met, as defined in the Table 3 below.

Where a severity is specified within this table, it shall be demonstrated that the corresponding risk is controlled to an                              acceptable level, considering the functional failure with their typical credible potential to lead directly to that severity                              as defined within the table.                           

###### *Table 3*

**Braking system — safety requirements**

Additional brake systems shall be considered in the safety study under the conditions specified in clauses 4.2.4.7 and 4.2.4.8.

The demonstration of compliance (conformity assessment procedure) is described in clause 6.2.3.5 of this TSI.

###### 4.2.4.3.*Type of brake system*U.K.

Units designed and assessed to be operated in general operation (various formations of vehicles from different origins; train                              formation not defined at design stage) on other track gauge systems than the 1 520 mm system shall be fitted with a brake                              system with a brake pipe compatible with the UIC brake system. To this end, the specification referenced in Appendix J-1,                              index 22. ‘Requirements for the brake system of trains hauled by a locomotive’ specifies the principles to be applied.                           

This requirement is set to ensure technical compatibility of the brake function between vehicles of various origins in a train.

There is no requirement on the type of brake system for units (trainsets or vehicles) assessed in fixed or predefined formation.

###### 4.2.4.4.*Brake command*U.K.

###### 4.2.4.4.1.Emergency braking commandU.K.

This clause applies to units fitted with a driver's cab.

At least two independent emergency brake command devices shall be available, allowing the activation of the emergency brake                              by a simple and single action from the driver in his normal driving position, using one hand.                           

The sequential activation of these two devices may be considered in the demonstration of compliance to the safety requirement                              No 1 of Table 3 of clause 4.2.4.2.2.                           

One of these devices shall be a red punch button (mushroom push button).

The emergency brake position of these two devices when activated shall be self-locking by a mechanical device; unlocking this                              position shall be possible only by an intentional action.                           

The activation of the emergency brake shall also be possible by the Control-Command and signalling on-board system, as defined                              in the TSI CCS.                           

Unless the command is cancelled, the emergency brake activation shall lead permanently, automatically to the following actions:
                -  transmission of an emergency brake command along the train by the brake control line, 
                -  cut-off of all tractive effort in less than 2 seconds; this cut-off shall not be able to be reset until the traction command                                    is cancelled by the driver,                                  
                -  an inhibition of all ‘release brake’ commands or actions. 

###### 4.2.4.4.2Service braking commandU.K.

This clause applies to units fitted with a driver's cab.

The service brake function shall allow the driver to adjust (by application or release) the brake force between a minimum                              and a maximum value in a range of at least 7 steps (including brake release and maximum brake force), in order to control                              the speed of the train.                           

The service braking command shall be active only in one location in a train. To meet this requirement, it shall be possible                              to isolate the service braking function of the other service braking command(s) of the unit(s) part of a train formation,                              as defined for fixed and predefined formations.                           

When the speed of the train is higher than 15 km/h, the service brake activation by the driver shall lead automatically to                              the cut-off of all tractive effort; this cut-off shall not be reset until the traction command is cancelled by the driver.                           

###### *Notes:*U.K.

          -  in case of service brake and traction controlled by automatic speed regulation, the traction cut-off is not required to be                           cancelled by the driver.                         
          -  a friction brake may be used intentionally at speed higher than 15 km/h with traction for specific purpose (de-icing, cleaning                           of brake components...); it shall not be possible to use these particular functionalities in case of emergency or service brake                           activation.                         

###### 4.2.4.4.3Direct braking commandU.K.

Locomotives (units designed to haul freight wagons or passenger carriages) assessed for general operation shall be fitted                              with a direct brake system.                           

The direct brake system shall allow the application of a brake force on the concerned unit(s) independently of the main brake                              command, with other unit(s) of the train remaining without brake applied.                           

###### 4.2.4.4.4Dynamic braking commandU.K.

If a unit is equipped with a dynamic brake system:

It shall be possible to prevent the use of regenerative braking on electric units so that there is no return of energy to                              the overhead contact line when driving on a line which does not allow that.                           

See also clause 4.2.8.2.3 for regenerative brake.

It is permitted to use a dynamic brake independently from other brake systems, or together with other brake systems (blending).

Where on locomotives the dynamic brake is used independently from other brake systems, it shall be possible to limit the maximum                              value and rate of variation of the dynamic brake effort to predefined values.                           

*Note:* this limitation relates to the forces transmitted to the track when locomotive(s) is (are) integrated in a train. It may                     be applied at operating level by setting the values necessary for compatibility with a particular line (e.g. line with high                     gradient and low curve radius).U.K.                  

###### 4.2.4.4.5Parking braking commandU.K.

This clause applies to all units.

The parking braking command shall lead to the application of a defined brake force for an unlimited period of time, during                              which a lack of any energy on board may occur.                           

It shall be possible to release the parking brake at standstill, including for rescue purposes.

For units assessed in fixed or predefined formations, and for locomotives assessed for general operation, the parking brake                              command shall be activated automatically when the unit is switched off. For other units, the parking brake command shall be                              either activated manually, or activated automatically when the unit is switched off.                           

*Note:* the application of the parking brake force may depend on the status of the main brake function; it shall be effective when                     the energy on board to apply the main brake function is lost or is going to increase or decrease (after having switched on                     or off the unit).U.K.                  

###### 4.2.4.5.*Braking performance*U.K.

###### 4.2.4.5.1General requirementsU.K.

The unit (trainset or vehicle) braking performance (deceleration = F(speed ) and equivalent response time) shall be determined                              by calculation as defined in the specification referenced in Appendix J-1, index 23, considering a level track.                           

Each calculation shall be performed for wheel diameters corresponding to new, half-worn and worn wheels, and shall include                              the calculation of the required wheel/rail adhesion level (see clause 4.2.4.6.1).                           

The friction coefficients used by friction brake equipment and considered in the calculation shall be justified (see the specification                              referenced in Appendix J-1, index 24).                           

The braking performance calculation shall be performed for the two control modes: emergency brake and maximum service brake.

The braking performance calculation shall be performed at design stage, and shall be revised (correction of parameters) after                              the physical tests required in the clauses 6.2.3.8 and 6.2.3.9, in order to be consistent with test results.                           

The final braking performance calculation (consistent with test results) shall be part of the technical documentation specified                              in clause 4.2.12.                           

The maximum average deceleration developed with all brakes in use, including the brake independent of wheel/rail adhesion,                              shall be lower than 2,5 m/s2; this requirement is linked to the longitudinal resistance of the track.                           

###### 4.2.4.5.2Emergency brakingU.K.

**Response time:**U.K.                  

For units assessed in fixed formation(s) or predefined formation(s), the equivalent response time(8) and the delay time(8) evaluated on the total emergency braking force developed in case of the emergency brake command shall be lower than the following                              values:                           
                -  Equivalent response time:                    -  3 seconds for units of maximum design speed higher or equal to 250 km/h 
                  -  5 seconds for other units 
                -  Delay time: 2 seconds 

For units designed and assessed for general operation, the response time shall be as specified for the UIC brake system (see                              also clause 4.2.4.3: the brake system shall be compatible with the UIC brake system).                           

**Calculation of the deceleration:**U.K.                  

For all units, the emergency braking performance calculation shall be performed in accordance with the specification referenced                              in Appendix J-1, index 26; the deceleration profile and stopping distances at the following initial speeds (if lower than                              the maximum design speed of the unit) shall be determined: 30 km/h; 100 km/h; 120 km/h; 140 km/h; 160 km/h; 200 km/h; 230                              km/h; 300 km/h; maximum design speed of the unit.                           

For units designed and assessed for general operation, the brake weight percentage (lambda) shall also be determined.

The specification referenced in Appendix J-1, index 25, clause 5.12 specifies how other parameters (brake weight percentage                              (lambda), braked mass) can be derived from the calculation of the deceleration or from the stopping distance of the unit.                           

The emergency braking performance calculation shall be performed with a brake system in two different modes, and considering                              degraded conditions:                           
                -  *Normal mode:* no failure in the brake system and nominal value of the friction coefficients (corresponding to dry conditions) used by friction                                    brake equipment. This calculation provides the braking performance normal mode.                                  
                -  *Degraded mode:* corresponding to the failures considered in clause 4.2.4.2.2, hazard no. 3, and nominal value of the friction coefficients                                    used by friction brake equipment. Degraded mode shall consider possible single failures; to that end, the emergency braking                                    performance shall be determined for the case of single point(s) failure(s) leading to the longest stopping distance, and the                                    associated single failure shall be clearly identified (component involved and failure mode, failure rate if available).                                  
                -  *Degraded conditions:* in addition, the emergency braking performance calculation shall be performed with reduced values of the friction coefficient,                                    with consideration of limit values for temperature and humidity (see the specification referenced in Appendix J-1, index 27,                                    clause 5.3.1.4).                                  

*Note:* these different modes and conditions have to be considered particularly when advanced Control Command and Signalling systems                              (such as ETCS) are implemented, aiming at optimising the railway system.U.K.                           

The emergency braking performance calculation shall be performed for the three following load conditions:
                -  minimum load: ‘design mass in working order’ (as described in clause 4.2.2.10) 
                -  normal load: ‘design mass under normal payload’ (as described in clause 4.2.2.10) 
                -  maximum braking load: load condition lower or equal to ‘design mass under exceptional payload’ (as described in clause 4.2.2.10)  In case this load condition is lower than ‘design mass under exceptional payload’, it shall be justified and documented in                                    the general documentation described in clause 4.2.12.2.                                  

Tests shall be performed to validate the emergency braking calculation, according to the conformity assessment procedure specified                              in clause 6.2.3.8.                           

For each load condition, the lowest result (i.e. leading to longest stopping distance) of the ‘emergency braking performance                              in normal mode’ calculations at the design maximum speed (revised according to the results of tests required above) shall                              be recorded in the technical documentation defined in clause 4.2.12.2 of this TSI.                           

Additionally, for units assessed in fixed or predefined formation of design maximum speed higher than or equal to 250 km/h,                              the stopping distance in case of ‘emergency braking performance in normal mode’ shall not exceed the following values for                              the load condition ‘normal load’:                           
                -  5 360 m from the speed of 350 km/h (if ≤ design maximum speed). 
                -  3 650 m from the speed 300 km/h (if ≤ design maximum speed). 
                -  2 430 m from the speed 250 km/h. 
                -  1 500 m from the speed 200 km/h. 

###### 4.2.4.5.3.Service brakingU.K.

**Calculation of the deceleration:**                   

For all units, the maximum service braking performance calculation shall be performed in accordance with the specification                              referenced in Appendix J-1, index 28 with a brake system in normal mode, with nominal value of the friction coefficients used                              by friction brake equipment for the load condition ‘design mass under normal payload’ at the design maximum speed.                           

Tests shall be performed to validate the maximum service braking calculation, according to the conformity assessment procedure                              specified in clause 6.2.3.9.                           

**Maximum service braking performance:**                   

When the service braking has higher design performance capability than the emergency braking, it shall be possible to limit                              the maximum service braking performance (by design of the braking control system, or as a maintenance activity) at a level                              lower than the emergency braking performance.                           

*Note:* A Member State may ask the emergency braking performance to be at a higher level than the maximum service braking performance                     for safety reasons, but in any case it cannot prevent the access to a railway undertaking using a higher maximum service braking                     performance, unless that Member State is able to demonstrate that the national safety level is endangered.U.K.                  

###### 4.2.4.5.4Calculations related to thermal capacityU.K.

This clause applies to all units.

For OTMs, it is allowed to verify this requirement by temperature measurements on wheels and brake equipment.

The brake energy capacity shall be verified by calculation showing that the braking system in normal mode is designed to withstand                              the dissipation of the braking energy. The reference values used in this calculation for the components of the braking system                              that dissipate energy shall either be validated by a thermal test or by previous experience.                           

This calculation shall include the scenario consisting of 2 successive emergency brake applications from the maximum speed                              (time interval corresponding to the time needed to accelerate the train up to the maximum speed) on level track for the load                              condition ‘maximum braking load’.                           

In case of unit that cannot be operated alone as a train, the time interval between 2 successive emergency brake applications                              used in the calculation shall be reported.                           

The maximum line gradient, associated length and operating speed for which the brake system is designed in relation with brake                              thermal energy capacity shall also be defined by a calculation for the load condition ‘maximum braking load’, with the service                              brake being used to maintain the train at a constant operating speed.                           

The result (maximum line gradient, associated length and operating speed) shall be recorded in the rolling stock documentation                              defined in clause 4.2.12 of this TSI.                           

The following ‘reference case’ for the slope to be considered is suggested: maintain the speed of 80 km/h on a slope of 21                              ‰ constant gradient over a distance of 46 km. If this reference case is used, the documentation may only mention the compliance                              to it.                           

For units assessed in fixed and predefined formation of design maximum speed higher than or equal to 250 km/h, they shall                              additionally be designed to operate with braking system in normal mode and load condition ‘maximum braking load’ at speed                              equal to 90 % of the maximum operating speed on maximum descending gradient of 25 ‰ during 10 km, and on maximum descending                              gradient of 35 ‰ during 6 km.                           

###### 4.2.4.5.5Parking brakeU.K.

**Performance:**                   

A unit (train or vehicle) in load condition ‘design mass in working order’ without any power supply available, and stationary                              permanently on a 40 ‰ gradient, shall be kept immobilised.                           

Immobilisation shall be achieved by means of the parking brake function, and additional means (e.g. scotches) in case where                              the parking brake is unable to achieve the performance on its own; the required additional means shall be available on board                              the train.                           

**Calculation:**                   

The unit (train or vehicle) parking brake performance shall be calculated as defined in the specification referenced in Appendix                              J-1, index 29. The result (gradient where the unit is kept immobilised by the parking brake alone) shall be recorded in the                              technical documentation defined in clause 4.2.12 of this TSI.                           

###### 4.2.4.6.*Wheel rail adhesion profile — Wheel slide protection system*U.K.

###### 4.2.4.6.1Limit of wheel rail adhesion profileU.K.

The braking system of a unit shall be designed so that emergency brake performance (dynamic brake included if it contributes                              to the performance) and the service brake performance (without dynamic brake) do not assume a calculated wheel/rail adhesion                              for each wheelset in the speed range > 30 km/h and < 250 km/h higher than 0,15 with the following exceptions:                           
                -  for units assessed in fixed or predefined formation(s) having 7 axles or less, the calculated wheel/rail adhesion shall not                                    be higher than 0,13,                                  
                -  for units assessed in fixed or predefined formation(s) having 20 axles or more the calculated wheel/rail adhesion for the                                    load case ‘minimum load’ is permitted to be higher than 0,15, but shall not be higher than 0,17.                                  

*Note:* for the load case ‘normal load’, there is no exception; the limit value of 0,15 applies.U.K.                           

This minimum number of axles may be reduced to 16 axles if the test required in Section 4.2.4.6.2 related to the efficiency                              of the WSP system is performed for the load case ‘minimum load’, and provides positive result.                           

In the speed range > 250 km/h and < = 350 km/h, the three limit values above shall decline linearly in order to be reduced                              by 0,05 at 350 km/h.                           

The above requirement shall also apply for a direct brake command described in clause 4.2.4.4.3.

The design of a unit shall not assume wheel/rail adhesion higher than 0,12 when calculating the parking brake performance.

These limits of wheel rail adhesion shall be verified by calculation with the smallest wheel diameter, and with the 3 load                              conditions considered in clause 4.2.4.5.2.                           

All values of adhesion shall be rounded to two decimal places.

###### 4.2.4.6.2.Wheel slide protection systemU.K.

A wheel slide protection system (WSP) is a system designed to make the best use of available adhesion by a controlled reduction                              and restoration of the brake force to prevent wheelsets from locking and uncontrolled sliding, thereby minimising the extension                              of stopping distances and possible wheel damage.                           

Requirements on the presence and use of a WSP system on the unit:

Units designed for maximum service speed higher than 150 km/h shall be fitted with a wheel slide protection system.

Units equipped with brake blocks on wheel running surface with a brake performance which assumes in the speed range > 30 km/h                              a calculated wheel/rail adhesion higher than 0.12 shall be fitted with a wheel slide protection system.                           

Units not equipped with brake blocks on wheel running surface with a brake performance which assumes in the speed range >                              30 km/h a calculated wheel/rail adhesion higher than 0. 11 shall be fitted with a wheel slide protection system.                           

The requirement on the wheel slide protection system above shall apply to the two brake modes: emergency brake and service                              brake.                           

It shall also apply to the dynamic brake system, which is part of the service brake, and can be part of the emergency brake                              (see clause 4.2.4.7).                           

Requirements on the WSP system performance:

For units equipped with a dynamic braking system, a WSP system (if present according to the point above) shall control the                              dynamic brake force; when this WSP system is not available, the dynamic brake force shall be inhibited, or limited in order                              not to lead a wheel/rail adhesion demand higher than 0.15.                           

The wheel slide protection system shall be designed according to the specification referenced in Appendix J-1, index 30, clause                              4; the conformity assessment procedure is specified in clause 6.1.3.2.                           

Requirements on performance at unit level:

If a unit is equipped with a WSP, a test shall be done to verify the efficiency of the WSP system (maximum extension of the                              stopping distance compared to stopping distance on dry rail) when integrated in the unit; the conformity assessment procedure                              is specified in clause 6.2.3.10.                           

The relevant components of the wheel slide protection system shall be considered in the safety analysis of the emergency brake                              function required in clause 4.2.4.2.2.                           

Wheel rotation monitoring system (WRM):

Units of design maximum speed higher or equal to 250 km/h shall be equipped with a wheel rotation monitoring system to advise                              the driver that an axle has seized; the wheel rotation monitoring system shall be designed according to the specification                              referenced in Appendix J-1, index 30, clause 4.2.4.3.                           

###### 4.2.4.7.*Dynamic brake — Braking system linked to traction system*U.K.

Where the braking performance of the dynamic brake or of braking system linked to the traction system is included in the performance                     of the emergency braking in normal mode defined in clause 4.2.4.5.2, the dynamic brake or the braking system linked to traction:                  

Shall be commanded by the main brake system control line (see clause 4.2.4.2.1).

Shall be subject to a safety analysis covering the hazard ‘after activation of an emergency command, complete loss of the                              dynamic brake force’.                           

This safety analysis shall be considered in the safety analysis required by the safety requirement N° 3 set out in clause                     4.2.4.2.2 for the emergency brake function.                  

For electric units, in case the presence on-board the unit of the voltage delivered by the external power supply is a condition                     for the dynamic brake application, the safety analysis shall cover failures leading to absence on-board the unit of that voltage.                  

In case the hazard above is not controlled at the level of the rolling stock (failure of the external power supply system),                     the braking performance of the dynamic brake or of braking system linked to the traction system shall not be included in the                     performance of the emergency braking in normal mode defined in clause 4.2.4.5.2.                  

###### 4.2.4.8.*Braking system independent of adhesion conditions*U.K.

###### 4.2.4.8.1.GeneralU.K.

Brake systems able to develop a brake force applied on the rail, independent of the wheel/rail adhesion condition, are a means                              of providing additional braking performance when the requested performance is higher than the performance corresponding to                              the limit of the available wheel rail adhesion (see clause 4.2.4.6).                           

It is permissible to include the contribution of brakes independent of wheel/rail adhesion in the braking performance in normal                              mode defined in clause 4.2.4.5 for the emergency brake; in such a case, the brake system independent of adhesion condition:                           

Shall be commanded by the main brake system control line (see clause 4.2.4.2.1).

Shall be subject of a safety analysis covering the hazard ‘after activation of an emergency command, complete loss of the                              brake force independent of the wheel/rail adhesion’.                           

This safety analysis shall be considered in the safety analysis required by the safety requirement No 3 set out in clause                              4.2.4.2.2 for the emergency brake function.                           

###### [F14.2.4.8.2.Magnetic track brakeU.K.

###### (1)Requirements on magnetic brakes specified for compatibility with train detection system based on axle counters are referenced                           in point 4.2.3.3.1.2(10) of this TSI.U.K.

###### (2)A magnetic track brake is allowed to be used as an emergency brake, as mentioned in the TSI INF, clause 4.2.6.2.2.U.K.

###### (3)The geometrical characteristics of the end elements of the magnet in contact with the rail shall be as specified for one of                           the types described in the specification referenced in Appendix J-1, index 31.U.K.

###### (4)Magnetic track brake shall not be used at speed higher than 280 km/h.U.K.

###### (5)The braking performance of the unit specified in clauses 4.2.4.5.2 of this TSI shall be determined with and without the use                           of magnetic track brakes.]U.K.

###### [F14.2.4.8.3.Eddy current track brakeU.K.

###### (1)This clause covers only eddy current track brake developing a brake force between the unit and the rail.U.K.

###### (2)Requirements on eddy current track brakes specified for compatibility with train detection system based on axle counters,                           track circuits, wheel detectors and vehicle detectors based on inductive loops are referenced in point 4.2.3.3.1.2(10) of                           this TSI.U.K.

###### (3)If the eddy current track brake requires a displacement of its magnets when the brake is applied, the unobstructed movement                           of such magnets between the ‘brake released’ and ‘brake applied’ positions shall be demonstrated by calculation in accordance with the specification referenced in Appendix J-1, index 14.U.K.

###### (4)The maximum distance between the eddy current track brake and the track corresponding to ‘brake released’ position will be recorded in the technical documentation described in clause 4.2.12 of this TSI.U.K.

###### (5)The eddy current track brake shall not operate below a fixed speed threshold.U.K.

###### (6)The conditions for use of eddy current track brake for technical compatibility with the track are not harmonised (regarding                           in particular their effect on rail heating and vertical force) and are an open point.U.K.

###### (7)The Register of Infrastructure indicates per track section if their use is allowed, and provides in such case their conditions                           for use.U.K.

          -  The maximum distance between the eddy current track brake and the track corresponding to ‘brake released’ referred to in point (4),                          
          -  Fixed speed threshold referred to in point (5),                          
          -  Vertical force as a function of the train speed, for the case of full application of eddy current track brake (emergency braking)                              and limited application of eddy current brake (service braking),                          
          -  Braking force as a function of the train speed, for the case of full application of eddy current track brake (emergency braking)                              and limited application of eddy current brake (service braking).                          

###### (8)The braking performance of the unit specified in clauses 4.2.4.5.2 and 4.2.4.5.3 of this TSI shall be determined with and                           without the use of eddy current track brakes.]U.K.

###### 4.2.4.9.*Brake state and fault indication*U.K.

Information available to train staff shall allow the identification of degraded conditions concerning the rolling stock (brake                              performance lower than the performance required), for which specific operating rules apply. To that end, it shall be possible                              at certain phases during operation for the train staff to identify the status (applied or released or isolated) of the main                              (emergency and service) and parking brake systems, and the status of each part (including one or several actuators) of these                              systems that can be controlled and/or isolated independently.                           

If the parking brake always depends directly on the state of main brake system, it is not required to have an additional and                              specific indication for the parking brake system.                           

The phases that shall be considered during operation are standstill and running.

When at a standstill, train staff shall be able to check from inside and/or outside of the train:
                -  The continuity of the train brake control command line, 
                -  The availability of the braking energy supply along the train, 
                -  The status of the main brake and parking brake systems and the status of each part (including one or several actuators) of                                    these systems that can be controlled and/or isolated separately (as described above in the first paragraph of this clause),                                    excepted for dynamic brake and braking system linked to traction systems.                                  

When running, the driver shall be able to check from the driving position in the cab:
                -  The status of the train brake control command line, 
                -  The status of the train brake energy supply, 
                -  The status of the dynamic brake and braking system linked to traction system where they are included in the performance of                                    the emergency braking in normal mode,                                  
                -  The status applied or released of at least one part (actuator) of the main brake system which is controlled independently                                    (e.g. a part which is installed on the vehicle fitted with an active cab).                                  

The function providing the information described above to the train staff is a function essential to safety, as it is used                              for the train staff to evaluate the braking performance of the train.                           

Where local information is provided by indicators, the use of harmonised indicators ensures the required safety level.

Where a centralised control system allowing the train staff to perform all checks from one location (i.e. inside the drivers                              cab) is provided, it shall be subject to a reliability study, considering the failure mode of components, redundancies, periodic                              checks and other provisions; based on this study, operating conditions of the centralised control system shall be defined                              and provided in the operating documentation described in clause 4.2.12.4.                           

Applicability to units intended for general operation:

Only functionalities that are relevant to the design characteristics of the unit (e.g. presence of a cab,...) shall be considered.

The signals transmission required (if any) between the unit and the other coupled unit(s) in a train for the information regarding                              the brake system to be available at train level shall be documented, taking into account functional aspects.                           

This TSI does not impose any technical solution regarding physical interfaces between units.

###### 4.2.4.10.*Brake requirements for rescue purposes*U.K.

All brakes (emergency, service, parking) shall be fitted with devices allowing their release and isolation. These devices                              shall be accessible and functional whether the train or vehicle is: powered, non-powered or immobilised without any available                              energy on board.                           

For units intended to be operated on other track gauge systems than 1 520 mm system, it shall be possible, following a failure                              during operation, to rescue a train with no energy available on board by a recovery power unit equipped with a pneumatic brake                              system compatible with the UIC brake system (brake pipe as braking control command line).                           

*Note:* see clause 4.2.2.2.4 of this TSI for mechanical and pneumatical interfaces of the recovery unit.U.K.                           

During the rescue, it shall be possible to have a part of the brake system of the rescued train controlled by means of an                              interface device; in order to meet this requirement, it is allowed to rely on low voltage provided by a battery to supply                              control circuits on the rescued train.                           

The braking performance developed by the rescued train in this particular operating mode shall be evaluated by a calculation,                              but is not required to be the same as the braking performance described in clause 4.2.4.5.2. The calculated braking performance                              and rescue operating conditions shall be part of the technical documentation described in clause 4.2.12.                           

This requirement does not apply to units which are operated in a train formation of less than 200 tons (load condition ‘design                              mass in working order’).                           

##### 4.2.5.*Passenger-related items*U.K.

For information purposes only, the following non-exhaustive list gives an overview of the basic parameters covered by the                     TSI PRM, which are applicable to units which are intended to carry passengers:                  
          -  seats, including priority seats 
          -  wheelchair spaces 
          -  exterior doors, including dimensions, passenger interface for controls 
          -  interior doors, including dimensions, passenger interface for controls 
          -  toilets 
          -  clearways 
          -  lighting 
          -  customer information 
          -  floor height changes 
          -  handrails 
          -  wheelchair-accessible sleeping accommodation 
          -  step position for vehicle access and egress, including steps and boarding aids. 

Additional requirements are specified below in this clause.

###### 4.2.5.1.*Sanitary systems*U.K.

If a water tap is provided in a unit and unless the water is provided from the tap in accordance with Council Directive 98/83/EC(9), a visual sign shall clearly indicate that the water provided at the tap is not drinkable.                           

Sanitary systems (toilets, washrooms, bar/restaurant facilities) where fitted shall not allow the release of any material                              that may be detrimental to the health of people or to the environment. Released materials (i.e. treated water; water with                              soap directly released from washrooms excluded) shall be conformant to the following Directives:                           
                -  The bacterial content of water discharged from sanitary systems shall not at any time exceed the bacterial content value for                                    Intestinal enterococci and *Escherichia coli* bacteria specified as ‘good’ for Inland waters in Directive 2006/7/EC of the European Parliament and of the Council(10) concerning the management of bathing water quality.                                  
                -  The treatment processes shall not introduce substances that are identified in Annex I of Directive 2006/11/EC of the European                                    Parliament and of the Council(11) on pollution caused by certain dangerous substances discharged into the aquatic environment of the Union.                                  

To limit the dispersion of released liquid on the trackside, uncontrolled discharge from any source shall take place downwards                              only, under the body frame of the vehicle in a distance not greater than 0,7 metres from the longitudinal centre line of the                              vehicle.                           

The following shall be provided in the technical documentation described in clause 4.2.12:
                -  The presence and type of toilets in a unit, 
                -  The characteristics of the flushing medium, if it is not clean water, 
                -  The nature of the treatment system for released water and the standards against which conformity has been assessed. 

###### 4.2.5.2.*Audible communication system*U.K.

This clause applies to all units designed to carry passengers and units designed to haul passenger trains.

Trains shall be equipped as a minimum with a means of audible communication:
                -  for the train crew to address the passengers in a train 
                -  for internal communication between the train crew and in particular between the driver and staff in the passenger area (if                                    any).                                  

The equipment shall be able to remain on standby independently of the main energy source for at least three hours. During                              the standby time the equipment shall be able to actually function at random intervals and periods during an accumulated time                              of 30 minutes.                           

The communication system shall be designed in such a manner that it continues to operate at least half (distributed throughout                              the train) of its loudspeakers in the event of a failure in one of its transmission elements or, as an alternative, another                              means shall be available to inform the passengers in the event of a failure.                           

Provisions for passengers to contact train crew are prescribed in clause 4.2.5.3 (passenger alarm) and in clause 4.2.5.4 (communication                              devices for passengers)                           

Applicability to units intended for general operation:

Only functionalities that are relevant to the design characteristics of the unit (e.g. presence of a cab, of a crew interface                              system,...) shall be considered.                           

The signals transmission required between the unit and the other coupled unit(s) in a train for the communication system to                              be available at train level shall be implemented and documented, taking into account functional aspects.                           

This TSI does not impose any technical solution regarding physical interfaces between units.

###### 4.2.5.3.*Passenger alarm*U.K.

###### 4.2.5.3.1GeneralU.K.

This clause is applicable to all units designed to carry passengers and units designed to haul passenger trains.

The passenger alarm function gives to anyone in the train the opportunity to advise the driver of a potential danger, and                              has consequences at operating level when activated (e.g. braking initiation in absence of reaction from the driver); it is                              a safety related function, for which the requirements, including safety aspects, are set out in this clause.                           

###### 4.2.5.3.2Requirements for information interfacesU.K.

With the exception of toilets and gangways, each compartment, each entrance vestibule and all other separated areas intended                              for passengers shall be equipped with at least one clearly visible and indicated alarm device to inform the driver of a potential                              danger.                           

The alarm device shall be designed so that once activated it cannot be cancelled by passengers.

At the triggering of the passenger alarm, both visual and acoustic signs shall indicate to the driver that one or more passenger                              alarms have been activated.                           

A device in the cab shall allow the driver to acknowledge his awareness of the alarm. The driver's acknowledgement shall be                              perceivable at the place where the passenger alarm was triggered and shall stop the acoustic signal in the cab.                           

On the driver's initiative, the system shall allow a communication link to be established between the driver's cab and the                              place where the alarm(s) was/were triggered for units designed for operation without staff on-board (other than driver).For                              units designed for operation with staff on-board (other than driver), it is permitted to have this communication link established                              between the driver's cab and the staff on-board.                           

The system shall allow the driver to cancel this communication link on his initiative.

A device shall enable the crew to reset the passenger alarm.

###### 4.2.5.3.3Requirements for activation of the brake by the passenger alarmU.K.

When the train is stopped at a platform or departing from a platform, activation of a passenger alarm shall lead to a direct                              application of the service brake or the emergency brake, resulting in a complete stop. In this case, only after the train                              has come to a complete stop, a system shall allow the driver to cancel any automatic braking action initiated by the passenger                              alarm;                           

In other situations, 10 +/-1 seconds after activation of the (first) passenger alarm, at least an automatic service brake                              shall be initiated unless the passenger alarm is acknowledged by the driver within this time. The system shall allow the driver                              to override at any time an automatic braking action initiated by the passenger alarm.                           

###### 4.2.5.3.4Criteria for a train departing from a platformU.K.

A train is deemed to be departing from a platform during the period of time elapsing between the moment when door status is                              changed from ‘released’ to ‘closed and locked’ and the moment when the train has partly left the platform.                           

This moment shall be detected on-board (function allowing physical detection of the platform or based on speed or distance                              criteria, or any alternative criteria).                           

For units intended to operate on lines that are fitted with the ETCS track side system for control-command and signalling                              (including ‘passenger door’ information as described in Annex A Index 7 of TSI CCS), this on-board device shall be able to                              receive from the ETCS system the information related to platform.                           

###### 4.2.5.3.5Safety requirementsU.K.

For the scenario ‘failure in the passenger alarm system leading to the impossibility for a passenger to initiate the activation                              of brake in order to stop the train when train departs from a platform’, it shall be demonstrated that the risk is controlled                              to an acceptable level considering that the functional failure has typical credible potential to lead directly to ‘single                              fatality and/or severe injury’.                           

For the scenario ‘failure in the passenger alarm system leading to no information given to the driver in case of activation                              of a passenger alarm’, it shall be demonstrated that the risk is controlled to an acceptable level considering that the functional                              failure has typical credible potential to lead directly to ‘single fatality and/or severe injury’.                           

The demonstration of conformity (conformity assessment procedure) is described in clause 6.2.3.5 of this TSI.

###### 4.2.5.3.6Degraded modeU.K.

Units fitted with a driver's cab shall be fitted with a device which allows authorised staff to isolate the passenger alarm                              system.                           

If the passenger alarm system is not functioning, either after intentional isolation by staff, due to a technical failure,                              or by coupling the unit with a non-compatible unit, this shall be permanently indicated to the driver in the active driver's                              cab, and application of the passenger alarm shall result in a direct application of brakes.                           

A train with an isolated passenger alarm system does not meet the minimum requirements for safety and interoperability as                              defined in this TSI and shall therefore be regarded to as being in degraded mode.                           

###### 4.2.5.3.7Applicability to units intended for general operationU.K.

Only functionalities that are relevant to the design characteristics of the unit (e.g. presence of a cab, of a crew interface                              system,...) shall be considered.                           

The signals transmission required between the unit and the other coupled unit(s) in a train for the passenger alarm system                              to be available at train level shall be implemented and documented, taking into account functional aspects described above                              in this clause.                           

This TSI does not impose any technical solution regarding physical interfaces between units.

###### 4.2.5.4.*Communication devices for passengers*U.K.

This clause applies to all units designed to carry passengers and units designed to haul passenger trains.

Units designed for operation without staff on-board (other than driver) shall be equipped with a ‘communication device’ for                              passengers to inform a person who can take appropriate action.                           

The requirements to the location of the ‘communication device’ are the ones applicable for the passenger alarm as defined                              in clause 4.2.5.3 ‘Passenger alarm: functional requirements’.                           

The system shall allow the communication link to be requested on the initiative of the passenger. The system shall allow the                              person receiving the communication (e.g. driver) to cancel this communication link at his initiative.                           

The ‘communication device’ interface to passengers shall be indicated by a harmonised sign, shall include visual and tactile                              symbols and shall emit a visual and audible indication that it has been operated. These elements shall be in accordance with                              the PRM TSI.                           

Applicability to units intended for general operation:

Only functionalities that are relevant to the design characteristics of the unit (e.g. presence of a cab, of a crew interface                              system, etc.) shall be considered.                           

The signals transmission required between the unit and the other coupled unit(s) in a train for the communication system to                              be available at train level shall be implemented and documented, taking into account functional aspects.                           

This TSI does not impose any technical solution regarding physical interfaces between units.

###### 4.2.5.5.*Exterior doors: passenger access to and egress from Rolling Stock*U.K.

###### 4.2.5.5.1.GeneralU.K.

This clause applies to all units designed to carry passengers and units designed to haul passenger trains.

Doors intended for staff and freight are dealt with in clauses 4.2.2.8 and 4.2.9.1.2 of this TSI.

The control of external passenger access doors is a function essential to safety; the functional and safety requirements expressed                              in this clause are necessary to ensure the safety level required.                           

###### 4.2.5.5.2Terminology usedU.K.

In the context of this clause a ‘door’ is an external passenger access door (with one or more leaves), intended primarily                              for passengers to enter and leave the unit.                           

A ‘locked door’ is a door held closed by a physical door locking device

A ‘door locked out of service’ is a door immobilised in a closed position by a manually operated mechanical locking device.

A door ‘released’ is a door that is able to be opened by operating the local or, central door control, (where the latter is                              available).                           

For the purpose of this clause, a train is assumed to be at a standstill when the speed has decreased to 3 km/h or less.

For the purpose of this clause, ‘train crew’ means one member of the on-board staff in charge of the checks related to the                              door system; it may be the driver or another member of the on-board staff.                           

###### 4.2.5.5.3.Door closing and lockingU.K.

The door control device shall allow the train crew to close and lock all the doors before the train departs.

Where a movable step has to be retracted, the closing sequence shall include the movement of the step to the retracted position.

When the centralised door closing and locking is activated from a local control, adjacent to a door, it is permissible for                              this door to remain open when the other doors close and lock. The door control system shall allow the staff to close and lock                              this door subsequently before departure.                           

The doors shall be kept closed and locked until they are released in accordance with clause 4.2.5.5.6 ‘Door opening’. In the                              event of loss of power to the door controls, the doors shall be kept locked by the locking mechanism.                           

*Note:* see clause 4.2.2.3.2 of TSI PRM for alert signal when closing a door.U.K.                  

**Door obstacle detection:**                   

External passenger access doors shall incorporate devices that detect if they close on an obstacle (e.g. a passenger). Where                              an obstacle is detected the doors shall automatically stop, and remain free for a limited period of time or reopen. The sensitivity                              of the system shall be such as to detect an obstacle according to the specification referenced in Appendix J-1, index 32,                              clause 5.2.1.4.1, with a maximum force on the obstacle according to the specification referenced in Appendix J-1, index 32,                              clause 5.2.1.4.2.1.                           

###### 4.2.5.5.4Locking a door out of serviceU.K.

A manually operated mechanical device shall be provided to enable (the train crew or maintenance staff) to lock a door out                              of service.                           

The locking out of service device shall:
                -  Isolate the door from any opening command 
                -  Lock the door mechanically in the closed position 
                -  Indicate the status of the isolation device 
                -  Permit the door to be by-passed by the ‘door-closed proving system’ 

###### 4.2.5.5.5Information available to the train crewU.K.

An appropriate ‘doors-closed proving system’ shall allow the train crew to check at any moment whether or not all the doors                              are closed and locked.                           

If one or more doors are not locked, this shall be continuously indicated to the train crew.

An Indication shall be provided to the train crew of any fault of a door closing and/or locking operation.

Audible and visual alarm signal shall indicate to the train crew an emergency opening of one or more doors.

A ‘door locked out of service’ is permitted to be by-passed by the ‘doors-closed proving system’.

###### 4.2.5.5.6Door openingU.K.

A train shall be provided with door release controls, which allow the train crew or an automatic device associated with the                              stop at a platform, to control the release of doors separately on each side, allowing them to be opened by passengers or,                              if available, by a central opening command when the train is at a standstill.                           

For units intended to operate on lines that are fitted with the ETCS track side system for control-command and signalling                              (including ‘passenger door’ information as described in Annex A, Index 7 of TSI CCS), this door release control system shall                              be able to receive from the ETCS system the information related to platform.                           

At each door, local opening controls or opening devices shall be accessible for passengers from both the outside and the inside                              of the vehicle.                           

Where a movable step has to be deployed, the opening sequence shall include the movement of the step to the deployed position.

*Note:* see clause 4.2.2.4.2 of TSI PRM for alert signal when opening a door.U.K.                  

###### 4.2.5.5.7Door-traction interlockU.K.

Traction power shall be applied only when all doors are closed and locked. This shall be ensured through an automatic door-traction                              interlock system. The door-traction interlock system shall prevent traction power being applied when not all of the doors                              are closed and locked.                           

The traction interlock system shall be provided with a manual override, intended to be activated by the driver in exceptional                              situations, to apply traction even when not all of the doors are closed and locked.                           

###### 4.2.5.5.8Safety requirements for clauses 4.2.5.5.2 to 4.2.5.5.7U.K.

For the scenario one door is unlocked (with train crew not correctly informed of this door status) or released or opened in                              inappropriate areas (e.g. wrong side of train) or situations (e.g. train running), it shall be demonstrated that the risk                              is controlled to an acceptable level, considering that the functional failure has typical credible potential to lead directly                              to:                           
                -  ‘single fatality and/or severe injury’ for units in which passengers are not supposed to stay in standing position in the                                    door area (long distance), or to                                  
                -  ‘single fatality and/or severe injury’ for units in which some passengers stay in standing position in the door area in normal                                    operation.                                  

For the scenario several doors are unlocked (with train crew not correctly informed of this door status) or released or opened                              in inappropriate areas (e.g. wrong side of the train) or situations (e.g. train running), it shall be demonstrated that the                              risk is controlled to an acceptable level, considering that the functional failure has typical credible direct potential to                              lead to:                           
                -  ‘fatality and/or severe injury’ for units in which passengers are not supposed to stay in standing position in the door area                                    (long distance), or to                                  
                -  ‘fatalities and/or severe injuries’ for units in which some passengers stay in standing position in the door area in normal                                    operation.                                  

The demonstration of conformity (conformity assessment procedure) is described in clause 6.2.3.5 of this TSI.

###### 4.2.5.5.9Door emergency openingU.K.

**Internal emergency opening:**                   

Each door shall be provided with an individual internal emergency-opening device accessible to passengers, that shall allow                              the door to open; this device shall be active when the speed is below 10 km/h.                           

It is allowed to have this device active at any speed (independent of any speed signal); in such a case, this device shall                              be operated after a succession of at least two actions.                           

This device is not required to have an effect on ‘a door locked out of service’. In such a case the door may be unlocked first.

**Safety requirement:**                   

For the scenario ‘failure in the internal emergency opening system of two adjacent doors along a through route (as defined                              in clause 4.2.10.5 of this TSI), the emergency opening system of other doors remaining available’, it shall be demonstrated                              that the risk is controlled to an acceptable level, considering that the functional failure has typical credible potential                              to lead directly to ‘single fatality and/or severe injury’.                           

The demonstration of compliance (conformity assessment procedure) is described in clause 6.2.3.5 of this TSI.

**External emergency opening:**                   

Each door shall be provided with an individual external emergency-opening device, accessible to rescue staff, to allow that                              door to be opened for emergency reasons. This device is not required to have an effect on ‘a door locked out of service’.                              In such a case the door shall be unlocked first.                           

**Manual force to open the door:**                   

For manual opening of the door, the force required to be exerted by a person shall be according to the specification referenced                              in Appendix J-1, index 33.                           

###### 4.2.5.5.10Applicability to units intended for general operationU.K.

Only functionalities that are relevant to the design characteristics of the unit (e.g. presence of a cab, of a crew interface                              system for door control, etc.) shall be considered.                           

The signals transmission required between the unit and the other coupled unit(s) in a train for the door system to be available                              at train level shall be implemented and documented, taking into account functional aspects.                           

This TSI does not impose any technical solution regarding physical interfaces between units.

###### 4.2.5.6.*Exterior door system construction*U.K.

If a unit is fitted with a door intended to be used by passengers to access or egress the train, the following provisions                              apply:                           

Doors shall be fitted with transparent windows to allow passengers to identify the presence of a platform.

The outside surface of passenger units shall be designed in such a way that they do not give the possibility for a person                              to ‘train surf’ when the doors are closed and locked.                           

As a measure to prevent ‘train surfing’, handholds on the outside surface of the door system shall be avoided or designed                              so that they cannot be gripped when the doors are closed.                           

Handrails and handholds shall be fixed so that they can withstand the forces exerted on them during operation.

###### 4.2.5.7.*Inter-unit doors*U.K.

This clause is applicable to all units designed to carry passengers.

Where a unit is equipped with inter-unit doors at the end of coaches or at unit-ends, they shall be fitted with a device that                              allows them to be locked (e.g. where a door is not connected by a gangway for use of passengers to an adjacent coach or unit,                              etc.).                           

###### 4.2.5.8.*Internal air quality*U.K.

The quantity and quality of air provided inside the area of vehicles occupied by passengers and/or staff shall be such that                              no risk is developed to the health of passengers or staff additional to those resulting from the external ambient air quality.                              This is achieved by complying with the requirements set up below.                           

A ventilation system shall maintain an acceptable interior CO2 level under operational conditions.                           

The CO2 level shall not exceed 5 000 ppm in all operating conditions, excepted in the 2 cases below:                           
                -  In case of interruption of the ventilation, due to an interruption of the main power supply or to a breakdown of the system,                                    an emergency provision shall ensure the supply of outside air into all passenger and staff areas.                                   If this emergency provision is ensured through battery supplied forced ventilation, the duration in which the CO2 level will remain below 10 000 ppm shall be defined, assuming a passenger load derived from the load condition ‘design mass                                    under normal payload’.                                   The conformity assessment procedure is defined in clause 6.2.3.12.  This duration shall not be less than 30 minutes.  The duration shall be recorded in the technical documentation defined in clause 4.2.12 of this TSI. 
                -  In case of switch off or closing of all means of external ventilation, or switch off of air conditioning system, in order                                    to prevent passengers being exposed to environmental fumes that may be present, especially in tunnels, and in the event of                                    a fire, as described in clause 4.2.10.4.2.                                  

###### 4.2.5.9.*Body side windows*U.K.

Where body side windows can be opened by passengers and cannot be locked by the train staff, the size of the opening shall                              be limited to such dimensions that it is not possible to pass a ball shaped object with 10cm diameter through it.                           

##### 4.2.6.*Environmental conditions and aerodynamic effects*U.K.

###### 4.2.6.1.*Environmental conditions — general*U.K.

Environmental conditions are physical, chemical or biological conditions external to a product and to which it is subjected                              to.                           

The environmental conditions to which rolling stock is subjected to influence the design of rolling stock, as well as this                              of its constituents.                           

The environmental parameters are described in the clauses below; for each environmental parameter, a nominal range is defined,                              which is the most commonly encountered in Europe, and is the basis for interoperable rolling stock.                           

For certain environmental parameters, ranges other than the nominal one are defined; in that case, a range shall be selected                              for the design of the rolling stock.                           

For the functions identified in the clauses below, design and/or testing provisions taken to ensure that the rolling stock                              is meeting the TSI requirements in this range shall be described in the technical documentation.                           

The selected range(s) shall be recorded in the technical documentation described in clause 4.2.12 of this TSI, as a characteristic                              of the rolling stock.                           

Depending on the ranges selected, and on provisions taken (described in the technical documentation), relevant operating rules                              could be necessary to ensure the technical compatibility between the rolling stock and environmental conditions that can be                              met on parts of the network.                           

In particular, operating rules are necessary when rolling stock designed for the nominal range is operated on a particular                              line where the nominal range is exceeded at certain periods of the year.                           

The ranges, if different than the nominal one, to be selected to avoid any restrictive operating rule(s) linked to a geographical                              area and climatic conditions, are specified by the Member States and are listed in the clause 7.4 of this TSI.                           

###### 4.2.6.1.1TemperatureU.K.

Rolling stock shall meet the requirements of this TSI within one (or several) of the temperature ranges T1 (– 25 °C to + 40                              °C; nominal), or T2 (– 40 °C to + 35 °C) or T3 (– 25 °C to + 45 °C) as defined in the specification referenced in Appendix                              J-1, index 34                           

The selected temperature range (s) shall be recorded in the technical documentation described in clause 4.2.12 of this TSI.

The temperature to consider for design purpose of rolling stock constituents shall take into account their integration in                              the rolling stock.                           

###### 4.2.6.1.2Snow, ice and hailU.K.

Rolling stock shall meet the requirements of this TSI when subject to snow, ice and hail conditions as defined in the specification                              referenced in Appendix J-1, index 35, which correspond to the nominal conditions (range).                           

The effect of snow, ice and hail to consider for design purpose of rolling stock constituents shall take into account their                              integration in the rolling stock.                           

Where more severe ‘snow, ice and hail’ conditions are selected, rolling stock and the parts of the subsystem shall then be                              designed to meet TSI requirements considering the following scenarios:                           
                -  Snowdrift (light snow with low water equivalent content), covering the track up to 80 cm continuously above top rail level. 
                -  Powder snow, snowfall of large quantities of light snow with low water equivalent content. 
                -  Temperature gradient, temperature and humidity variation during one single run causing ice build-ups on the rolling stock. 
                -  Combined effect with low temperature according to the temperature zone chosen as defined in clause 4.2.6.1.1. 

In relation with clause 4.2.6.1.1 (climatic zone T2) and with the present clause 4.2.6.1.2 (severe conditions for snow, ice                              and hail) of this TSI, the provisions taken to meet TSI requirements in these severe conditions shall be identified and verified,                              in particular design and/or testing provisions that are required for the following TSI requirements:                           
                -  Obstacle deflector as defined in this TSI clause 4.2.2.5: additionally, capability to remove snow in front of the train.  Snow shall be considered as an obstacle to be removed by the obstacle defector; the following requirements are defined in                                    clause 4.2.2.5 (by reference to the specification referenced in Appendix J-1, index 36):                                   ‘The obstacle deflector needs to be of sufficient size to sweep obstacles clear of the path of the bogie. It shall be a continuous                                       structure and shall be designed so as not to deflect objects upwards or downwards. Under normal operating conditions, the                                       lower edge of the obstacle deflector shall be as close to the track as the vehicle movements and gauge line will permit.                                   In plan view the deflector should approximate to a ‘V’ profile with an included angle of not more than 160°. It can be designed                                       with a compatible geometry to function also as a snow plough’                                   The forces specified in clause 4.2.2.5 of this TSI are deemed to be sufficient in order to remove the snow. 
                -  Running gear as defined in the TSI clause 4.2.3.5: considering snow and ice build-up and possible consequence on running stability                                    and brake function.                                  
                -  Brake function and brake power supply as defined in the TSI clause 4.2.4. 
                -  Signalling the presence of the train to others as defined in the TSI clause 4.2.7.3. 
                -  Providing a view ahead as defined in the TSI clause 4.2.7.3.1.1 (head lights) and 4.2.9.1.3.1 (front visibility), with windscreen's                                    equipment as defined in clause 4.2.9.2 functioning.                                  
                -  Providing the driver with acceptable climate for working as defined in the TSI clause 4.2.9.1.7. 

The selected range for ‘snow, ice and hail’ (nominal or severe) and provision adopted shall be documented in the technical                              documentation described in clause 4.2.12.2 of this TSI.                           

###### 4.2.6.2.*Aerodynamic effects*U.K.

[F1The requirements in this clause apply to all rolling stock. For rolling stock operated on the 1 520 mm and 1 600 mm track gauge systems, in case of a maximum speed higher than the limits specified in the clauses 4.2.6.2.1 to 4.2.6.2.5,                                 the procedure for innovative solution shall apply.]                            

The passing of a train causes an unsteady airflow with varying pressures and flow velocities. These pressure and flow velocity                              transients have an effect on persons, objects and buildings at the trackside; they have also an effect on the rolling stock                              (e.g. aerodynamic load on vehicle structure, buffeting of equipment), and are to be taken into account in the design of rolling                              stock.                           

The combined effect of train speed and air speed causes an aerodynamic rolling moment that can affect the stability of rolling                              stock.                           

###### [F14.2.6.2.1.Slipstream effects on passengers on platform and on workers tracksideU.K.

###### (1)Units of maximum design speed vtr, max > 160 km/h, running in the open air at a reference speed vtr,ref shall not cause the                           air speed to exceed, at each measurement point defined in clause 4.2.2.1 and Table 5 of the specification referenced in Appendix                           J-1 index 108, the value u95 %,max as indicated in Table 5 of the specification referenced in Appendix J-1, index 108.U.K.

###### (2)For units intended to be operated on the networks with track gauges of 1 524 mm and 1 668 mm, the corresponding values in Table 4 referring to the parameters of the specification referenced in Appendix J-1, index                           108 shall be applied:U.K.

###### *Table 4*

**Limit criteria**

###### (3)The train formation to be tested is specified for fixed/predefined formations and units assessed for use in general operation                           respectively in clauses 4.2.2.2 and 4.2.2.4 of the specification referenced in Appendix J-1, index 108. Single units fitted                           with a drivers cab shall be tested within a formation complying with the requirements set out in clause 4.2.2.3 of specification                           referenced in Appendix J-1, index 108.U.K.

###### (4)The conformity assessment procedure is described in clause 6.2.3.13 of this TSI.]U.K.

###### 4.2.6.2.2.Head pressure pulseU.K.

[F1The passing of two trains generates an aerodynamic load on each of the two trains. The requirement on head pressure pulse                                 in open air allows a limit aerodynamic load induced by the rolling stock in open air to be defined assuming a distance between                                 track centres for the track where the train is intended to be operated.                            

The distance between track centres depends on the speed and the gauge of the line. Minimum values of a distance between track                                 centres depending on speed and gauge are defined in the INF TSI.]                            

[F1Units with a maximum design speed higher than 160 km/h running in the open air at their reference speed vtr,ref on 1 435 mm track gauge shall not cause the maximum peak-to-peak pressure to exceed the maximum permissible pressure change defined                                 in Table 2 of the specification referenced in Appendix J-1, index 109 assessed over the measurement positions defined in point                                 4.1.2 of the specification referenced in Appendix J-1, index 109.]                            

[F1For units intended to be operated on the networks with track gauges of 1 524 mm and 1 668 mm, the corresponding values in Table 4a referring to the parameters of the specification referenced in Appendix J-1, index                                 109 shall be applied:                            

###### *Table 4a*

**Limit criteria**

The formation to be verified by a test is specified below for different types of rolling stock:
                -  Unit assessed in fixed or predefined formation:                    -  A single unit of the fixed formation or any configuration of the predefined formation. 
                -  Unit assessed for use in general operation (train formation not defined at design stage):                    -  Unit fitted with a drivers cab shall be assessed alone. 
                  -  Other units: Requirement not applicable. 

The conformity assessment procedure is described in clause 6.2.3.14 of this TSI.

###### 4.2.6.2.3.Maximum pressure variations in tunnelsU.K.

Units of maximum design speed higher than or equal to 200 km/h shall be aerodynamically designed so that for a given combination                              (reference case) of train speed and tunnel cross section in case of a solo run in a simple, non-inclined tube-like tunnel                              (without any shafts etc.) a requirement for the characteristic pressure variation shall be met. The requirements are given                              in the Table 5.                           

###### *Table 5*

**Requirements for units in a solo-run in a non-inclined tube-like tunnel**

Where vtr is the train speed and Atu is the tunnel cross sectional area.                           

The formation to be verified by a test is specified below for different types of rolling stock:
                -  Unit assessed in fixed or predefined formation: assessment shall be made with the maximum length of the train (including multiple                                    operation of trainsets).                                  
                -  Unit assessed for general operation (train formation not defined at design stage) and fitted with a driver's cab: two arbitrary                                    train compositions of minimum length 150 m; one with the unit in leading position and one with the unit at the end.                                  
                -  Other units (coaches for general operation): on the basis of one train formation of at least 400 m. 

The conformity assessment procedure, including definition of parameters mentioned above is described in clause 6.2.3.15 of                              this TSI.                           

###### 4.2.6.2.4.Cross windU.K.

This requirement applies to units of maximum design speed higher than 140 km/h.

For units of maximum design speed higher than 140 km/h and lower than 250 km/h the characteristic wind curve (CWC) of the                              most sensitive vehicle shall be determined in accordance with the specification referenced in Appendix J-1, index 37 and subsequently                              recorded in the technical file as per clause 4.2.12.                           

For units of maximum design speed equal to or higher than 250 km/h the crosswind effects shall be evaluated according to one                              of the following methods:                           

determined and complying with the specification of the HS RST TSI 2008 clause 4.2.6.3,

or

determined by the assessment method of the specification referenced in Appendix J-1, index 37. The resulting characteristic                                       wind curve of the most sensitive vehicle of the unit under assessment shall be recorded in the technical documentation as                                       per clause 4.2.12.                                    

###### [F14.2.6.2.5.Aerodynamic effect on ballasted tracksU.K.

###### (1)This requirement applies to units of maximum design speed higher than 250 km/h.U.K.

###### (2)The requirement on the aerodynamic effect of trains on ballasted tracks, in order to limit risks induced by the projection                           of ballast (ballast pick up), is an open point.]U.K.

##### 4.2.7.*External lights & visible and audible warning devices*U.K.

###### 4.2.7.1.*External lights*U.K.

The colour green shall not be used for external light or illumination; this requirement is made to prevent any confusion with                              fixed signals.                           

[F1This requirement is not applicable to lights with luminous intensity not higher than 100 cd that are included in push buttons                                 for the command of passenger doors (not continuously lit).]                            

###### 4.2.7.1.1.Head lightsU.K.

This clause applies to units fitted with a driver's cab.

Two white headlamps shall be provided at the front end of the train in order to give visibility for the train driver.

These head lamps shall be located:
                -  at the same height above the rail level, with their centres between 1 500 and 2 000 mm above the rail level, 
                -  symmetrically compared to the centre-line of rails, and with a distance between their centres not less than 1 000 mm. 

The colour of head lamps shall be in accordance with the values specified in the specification referenced in Appendix J-1,                              index 38, clause 5.3.3, Table 1.                           

Headlamps shall provide 2 luminous intensity levels: ‘dimmed headlamp’ and ‘full-beam headlamp’.

For ‘dimmed headlamp’, the luminous intensity of headlamps measured along the optical axis of the head lamp shall be in accordance                              with the values specified in the specification referenced in Appendix J-1, index 38, clause 5.3.4, table 2, first line.                           

For ‘full-beam headlamp’, the minimum luminous intensity of headlamps measured along the optical axis of the lamp shall be                              in accordance with the values specified in the specification referenced in Appendix J-1, index 38, clause 5.3.4, Table 2,                              first line.                           

The installation of head lamps on the unit shall provide a means of alignment adjustment of their optical axis when installed                              on the unit according to the specification referenced in Appendix J-1, index 38, clause 5.3.5, to be used during maintenance                              activities.                           

Additional head lamps may be provided (e.g. upper head lamps). These additional head lamps shall fulfil the requirement on                              the colour of head lamps specified above in this clause.                           

*Note:* additional head lamps are not mandatory; their use at operational level may be subject to restrictions.U.K.                  

###### 4.2.7.1.2Marker lightsU.K.

This clause applies to units fitted with a driver's cab.

Three white marker lamps shall be provided at the front end of the train in order to make the train visible.

Two lower marker lamps shall be located:
                -  at the same height above the rail level, with their centres between 1 500 and 2 000 mm above the rail level, 
                -  symmetrically compared to the centre-line of rails, and with a distance between their centres not less than 1 000 mm. 

The third marker lamp shall be located centrally above the two lower lamps, with a vertical separation between their centres                              equal to or greater than 600 mm.                           

It is permitted to use the same component for both head lights and marker lights.

The colour of marker lamps shall be in accordance with the values specified in the specification referenced in Appendix J-1,                              index 39, clause 5.4.3.1, Table 4.                           

The spectral radiation distribution of light from the marker lamps shall be in accordance with the values specified in the                              specification referenced in Appendix J-1, index 39, clause 5.4.3.2.                           

The luminous intensity of marker lamps shall be in accordance with the specification referenced in Appendix J-1, index 39,                              clause 5.4.4, Table 6.                           

###### 4.2.7.1.3Tail lightsU.K.

Two red tail lamps shall be provided at the rear end of units intended to be operated at the rear end of the train in order                              to make the train visible.                           

For units without driver's cab assessed for general operation, the lamps may be portable lamps; in that case, the type of                              portable lamp to be used shall be in accordance with the Appendix E of the ‘freight wagons’ TSI; the function shall be verified                              by design examination and type test at component level (interoperability constituent ‘portable tail lamp’), but it is not                              required to provide the portable lamps.                           

The tail lamps shall be located:
                -  at the same height above the rail level, with their centres between 1 500 and 2 000 mm above the rail level, 
                -  symmetrically compared to the centre-line of rails, and with a distance between their centres not less than 1 000 mm. 

The colour of tail lamps shall be in accordance with the specification referenced in Appendix J-1, index 40, clause 5.5.3,                              Table 7.                           

The luminous intensity of tail lamps shall be in accordance with the specification referenced in Appendix J-1, index 40, clause                              5.5.4, Table 8.                           

###### 4.2.7.1.4Lamp controlsU.K.

This clause applies to units fitted with a driver's cab.

It shall be possible for the driver to control:
                -  the head, marker lamps of the unit from the normal driving position; 
                -  the tail lamps of the unit from the cab. 

This control may use independent command or combination of commands.

*Note:* where it is intended to use lights to inform of an emergency situation (operating rule, see TSI OPE), this should be done                     only by means of head lamps in flashing/blinking mode.U.K.                  

###### 4.2.7.2.*Horn (audible warning device)*U.K.

###### 4.2.7.2.1GeneralU.K.

This clause applies to units fitted with a driving cab.

Trains shall be fitted with warning horns in order to make the train audible.

The notes of the audible warning horns are intended to be recognisable as being from a train and not be similar to warning                              devices used in road transport or as factory or other common warning device. The operation of the warning horns shall emit                              at least one of the following separate warning sounds below:                           

:

the fundamental frequency of the separately sounded note shall be 660 Hz ± 30 Hz (high note).

:

the fundamental frequency of the separately sounded note shall be 370 Hz ± 20 Hz (low note).

In case additional warning sounds to one of the above (separate or combined) are provided on a voluntary basis, their sound                              pressure level shall not be higher than values specified below in the clause 4.2.7.2.2.                           

*Note:* their use at operational level may be subject to restrictions.U.K.                  

###### 4.2.7.2.2Warning horn sound pressure levelsU.K.

The C weighted sound pressure level produced by each horn sounded separately (or in a group if designed to sound simultaneously                              as a chord) when integrated on the unit shall be as defined in the specification referenced in Appendix J-1, index 41.                           

The conformity assessment procedure is specified in clause 6.2.3.17.

###### 4.2.7.2.3ProtectionU.K.

Warning horns and their control systems shall be designed or protected, so far as is practicable, to maintain their function                              when impacted by airborne objects such as debris, dust, snow, hail or birds.                           

###### 4.2.7.2.4Horn controlU.K.

It shall be possible for the driver to sound the audible warning device from all driving positions specified in clause 4.2.9                              of this TSI.                           

##### 4.2.8.*Traction and electrical equipment*U.K.

###### 4.2.8.1.*Traction performance*U.K.

###### 4.2.8.1.1.GeneralU.K.

The purpose of the train traction system is to ensure that the train is able to be operated at various speeds up to its maximum                              service speed. The primary factors that influence traction performance are traction power, train composition and mass, adhesion,                              track gradient and train running resistance.                           

Unit performance for units fitted with traction equipment, and operated in various train formations shall be defined so that                              the overall traction performance of the train can be derived.                           

The traction performance is characterised by the maximum service speed and by the traction force profile (force at wheel rim                              = F(speed))                           

The unit is characterised by its running resistance and its mass.

The maximum service speed, the traction force profile and the running resistance are the unit contributions necessary to define                              a timetable allowing a train to slot into the overall traffic pattern on a given line, and are part of the technical documentation                              related to the unit described in clause 4.2.12.2 of this TSI.                           

###### 4.2.8.1.2Requirements on performanceU.K.

This clause applies to units fitted with traction equipment.

Unit traction force profiles (force at wheel rim =F(speed)) shall be determined by calculation; the unit running resistance                              shall be determined by a calculation for the load case ‘design mass under normal payload’, as defined in clause 4.2.2.10.                           

Unit traction force profiles and running resistance shall be recorded in the technical documentation (see clause 4.2.12.2).

The design maximum speed shall be defined from the data above for the load case ‘design mass under normal payload’ on a level                              track; design maximum speed higher than 60 km/h shall be a multiple of 5 km/h.                           

For units assessed in fixed or predefined formation, at the maximum service speed and on a level track, the unit shall still                              be capable of an acceleration of at least 0,05 m/s2 for the load case ‘design mass under normal payload’. This requirement may be verified by calculation or by testing (acceleration                              measurement) and applies for maximum design speed up to 350 km/h.                           

Requirements regarding the traction cut-off required in case of braking are defined in the clause 4.2.4 of this TSI.

Requirements regarding availability of the traction function in case of fire on board are defined in the clause 4.2.10.4.4.

**Additional requirement for units assessed in fixed or predefined formation of maximum design speed higher than or equal to                        250 km/h:**                   

The mean acceleration on a level track, for the load case ‘design mass under normal payload’, shall be of at least of:
                -  0,40 m/s2 from 0 to 40 km/h                                  
                -  0,32 m/s2 from 0 to 120 km/h                                  
                -  0,17 m/s2 from 0 to 160 km/h.                                  

This requirement may be verified by calculation only or by testing (acceleration measurement) combined with calculation.

The design of the traction system shall assume a calculated wheel/rail adhesion not higher than:
                -  0,30 at start up and very low speed 
                -  0,275 at 100 km/h 
                -  0,19 at 200 km/h 
                -  0,10 at 300 km/h. 

A single failure of power equipment affecting the traction capability shall not deprive the unit of more than 50 % of its                              traction force.                           

###### 4.2.8.2.*Power supply*U.K.

###### 4.2.8.2.1GeneralU.K.

Requirements applicable to rolling stock, and which interface with the Energy subsystem are dealt with in this clause; therefore,                              this clause 4.2.8.2 applies to electric units.                           

The TSI Energy specifies the following power systems: AC 25 kV 50 Hz system, AC 15 kV 16,7 Hz system, DC 3 kV system and 1,5                              kV system. As a consequence, requirements defined below are related to these 4 systems only, and references to standards are                              valid for these 4 systems only.                           

###### 4.2.8.2.2Operation within range of voltages and frequenciesU.K.

Electric units shall be able to operate within the range of at least one of the systems ‘voltage and frequency’ defined in                              the TSI Energy, clause 4.2.3.                           

The actual value of the line voltage shall be available in the driver cab in driving configuration.

The systems ‘voltage and frequency’ for which the rolling stock is designed shall be recorded in the technical documentation                              defined in clause 4.2.12.2 of this TSI.                           

###### 4.2.8.2.3Regenerative brake with energy to the overhead contact lineU.K.

Electric units which return electrical energy to the overhead contact line in regenerative braking mode shall comply with                              the specification referenced in Appendix J-1, index 42.                           

It shall be possible to control the use of the regenerative brake.

###### 4.2.8.2.4Maximum power and current from the overhead contact lineU.K.

Electric units with power higher than 2 MW (including the declared fixed and predefined formations) shall be equipped with                              power or current limitation function.                           

Electric units shall be equipped with automatic regulation of the current within abnormal operation condition regarding voltage;                              this regulation shall allow limiting the current to the ‘maximum current against voltage’ specified in the specification referenced                              in Appendix J-1, index 43.                           

*Note:* a less restrictive limitation (lower value of coefficient ‘a’) may be used at operating level on a particular network or                              line if agreed by the Infrastructure Manager.U.K.                           

The maximum current assessed here above (rated current) shall be recorded in the technical documentation defined in clause                              4.2.12.2 of this TSI.                           

###### 4.2.8.2.5Maximum current at standstill for DC systemsU.K.

For DC systems, the maximum current at standstill per pantograph shall be calculated and verified by measurement.

Limit values are specified in clause 4.2.5 of the TSI Energy.

The value measured and measurement conditions regarding the material of the contact wire shall be recorded in the technical                              documentation defined in clause 4.2.12.2 of this TSI.                           

###### 4.2.8.2.6Power factorU.K.

The power factor design data of the train (including multiple operation of several units as defined in clause 2.2 of this                              TSI) shall be subject to a calculation to verify acceptance criteria set out in the specification referenced in Appendix J-1,                              index 44.                           

###### 4.2.8.2.7System energy disturbances for ac systemsU.K.

An Electric unit shall not cause unacceptable overvoltage and other phenomena described in the specification referenced in                              Appendix J-1, index 45, clause 10.1(harmonics and dynamic effects) on the overhead contact line.                           

A compatibility study shall be done in accordance with the methodology defined in the specification referenced in Appendix                              J-1, index 45, clause 10.3. The steps and hypothesis described in Table 5 of the same specification have to be defined by                              the applicant (column 3 ‘Concerned party’ not applicable), with input data presented as in Annex D of the same specification;                              the acceptance criteria shall be as defined in clause 10.4 the same specification.                           

All hypothesis and data considered for this compatibility study shall be recorded in the technical documentation (see clause                              4.2.12.2).                           

###### [F44.2.8.2.8On-board energy measurement systemU.K.

###### 4.2.8.2.8.1GeneralU.K.

###### (1)The on-board energy measurement system (EMS) is the system for measurement of all active and reactive electric energy taken                           from or returned (during regenerative braking) to the overhead contact line (OCL) by the electric unit.U.K.

###### (2)The EMS shall include at least the following functions: Energy measurement function (EMF) as set out in clause 4.2.8.2.8.2,                           data handling system (DHS) as set out in clause 4.2.8.2.8.3.U.K.

###### (3)A suitable communication system will send the compiled energy billing data sets (CEBD) to an on-ground data collecting system                           (DCS). The interface protocols and transferred data format between EMS and DCS shall fulfil the requirements set out in point                           4.2.8.2.8.4.U.K.

###### (4)This system is suitable for billing purposes; the data sets defined in point 4.2.8.2.8.3(4) provided by this system shall                           be accepted for billing in all Member States.U.K.

###### (5)The EMS rated current and voltage shall be matched to the electric unit rated current and voltage; it shall continue to function                           correctly when changing between several traction energy supply systems.U.K.

###### (6)Data stored in the EMS shall be protected against loss of the power supply and the EMS shall be protected from non-authorised                           access.U.K.

###### (7)An on-board location function providing location data originated from an external source to the DHS shall be provided in networks                           where such function is necessary for billing purposes only. In any case, the EMS system shall be able to accommodate a compatible                           location function. If the location function is provided, it shall fulfil the requirements set out in specification referenced                           in Appendix J-1, index 116.U.K.

###### (8)The fitment of an EMS, its on-board location function, the description of on-board to ground communication and the metrological                           control including the accuracy class of the EMF shall be recorded in the technical documentation described in clause 4.2.12.2                           of this TSI.U.K.

###### (9)The maintenance documentation described in clause 4.2.12.3 of this TSI shall include any periodic verification procedure to                           ensure the required accuracy level of the EMS during its lifetime.U.K.

###### 4.2.8.2.8.2Energy measurement function (EMF)U.K.

###### (1)The EMF shall ensure the measurement of the voltage and current, calculation of the energy and production of energy data.U.K.

###### (2)The energy data produced by EMF shall have a time reference period of 5 minutes defined by the Universal Time Coordinated                           (UTC) clock time at the end of each time reference period; originating from the time stamp 00:00:00. It is permitted to use                           a shorter measuring period if the data can be aggregated on-board into 5 minutes time reference period.U.K.

###### (3)The accuracy of EMF for active energy measurement shall comply with clauses 4.2.3.1 to 4.2.3.4 of the specification referenced                           in Appendix J-1, index 117.U.K.

###### (4)Each device containing one or more functions of EMF shall indicate: metrological control, and its accuracy class, according                           to the class designations specified in the specification referenced in clauses 4.3.3.4, 4.3.4.3 and 4.4.4.2 of the specification                           referenced in Appendix J-1, index 117.U.K.

###### (5)The conformity assessment of the accuracy is set out in clause 6.2.3.19a.U.K.

###### 4.2.8.2.8.3Data handling system (DHS)U.K.

###### (1)The DHS shall ensure the production of compiled energy billing data sets for energy billing purposes, by merging data from                           the EMF with time data and, when required, geographical position, and storing it ready to be sent to an on-ground data collecting                           system (DCS) by a communication system.U.K.

###### (2)The DHS shall compile the data without corrupting them and shall incorporate data storage with a memory capacity sufficient                           to store the compiled data of at least 60 days continuous operation. The time reference used shall be the same as in the EMF.U.K.

###### (3)The DHS shall have a capability to be interrogated locally on-board for audit and data recovery purposes.U.K.

###### (4)The DHS shall produce compiled energy billing data sets, (CEBD), by merging the following data for each time reference period:U.K.

          -  unique EMS consumption point identification (CPID) as defined in the specification referenced in Appendix J-1, index 118,                          
          -  end time of each period, defined as year, month, day, hour, minute and second,                          
          -  location data at the end of each period,                          
          -  consumed/regenerated active and reactive (if appropriate) energy in each period, in units of watt-hour (active energy) and                              var-hour (reactive energy) or their decimal-multiples.                          

###### (5)The conformity assessment of compilation and handling of data produced by DHS is set out in clause 6.2.3.19a.U.K.

###### 4.2.8.2.8.4Interface protocols and transferred data format between EMS and DCSU.K.

The data exchange between EMS and DCS shall fulfil the following requirements:                   
          -  The application services (service layer) of the EMS shall comply with clause 4.3.3.1 of the specification referenced in Appendix                              J-1, index 119.                          
          -  User access rights for these application services shall comply with clause 4.3.3.3 of the specification referenced in Appendix                              J-1, index 119.                          
          -  The structure (data layer) for these application services shall comply with the XML schema as defined in clause 4.3.4 of the                              specification referenced in Appendix J-1, index 119.                          
          -  The message mechanism (message layer) for supporting these application services shall comply with the methods and the XML                              schema in clause 4.3.5 of the specification referenced in Appendix J-1, index 119.                          
          -  The application protocols for supporting the message mechanism shall comply with clause 4.3.6 of the specification referenced                              in Appendix J-1, index 119.                          
          -  The EMS shall use at least one of the communication architectures in clause 4.3.7 of the specification referenced in Appendix                              J-1, index 119.]                          

Textual Amendments

F4Substituted by Commission Implementing Regulation (EU) 2018/868 of 13 June 2018 amending Regulation (EU) No 1301/2014 and Regulation (EU)                                 No 1302/2014 as regards provisions on energy measuring system and data collecting system (Text with EEA relevance).

###### 4.2.8.2.9Requirements linked to pantographU.K.

###### 4.2.8.2.9.1Working range in height of pantographU.K.

###### 4.2.8.2.9.1.1Height of interaction with contact wires (RST level)U.K.

The installation of a pantograph on an Electric unit shall allow mechanical contact from at least one of the contact wires                     at heights between:                  

4 800 mm and 6 500 mm above rail level for tracks designed in accordance with the gauge GC.

4 500 mm and 6 500 mm above rail level for tracks designed in accordance with the gauge GA/GB.

5 550 mm and 6 800 mm above rail level for tracks designed in accordance with the gauge T (track gauge system 1 520 mm).

5 600 mm and 6 600 mm above rail level designed in accordance with the gauge FIN1 (track gauge system 1 524 mm).

[F23 920 mm and 5 700 mm above rail level for electric units designed to be operated on the 1 500 V DC system in accordance with the IRL gauge (track gauge system 1 600 mm).]                            

*Note:* current collection is verified according to clauses 6.1.3.7 and 6.2.3.21 of this TSI, specifying heights of contact wire                     for tests; however, current collection at low speed is assumed to be possible from a contact wire at any of the heights specified                     above.U.K.                  

###### 4.2.8.2.9.1.2Working range in height of pantograph (IC level)U.K.

Pantographs shall have a working range of at least 2 000 mm.

The characteristics to be verified shall be in accordance with the requirements of the specification referenced in Appendix                              J-1, index 46.                           

###### 4.2.8.2.9.2Pantograph head geometry (IC level)U.K.

[F1For electric units designed to be operated on other track gauge systems than 1 520 mm or 1 600 mm system, at least one of the pantograph(s) to be installed shall have a head geometry type compliant with one of the two                                 specifications given in the clauses 4.2.8.2.9.2.1 and 2 below.]                            

For electric units designed to be operated solely on the 1 520 mm system, at least one of the pantograph(s) to be installed                              shall have a head geometry type compliant with one of the three specifications given in the clauses 4.2.8.9.2.1, 2 and 3 below.                           

[F2For electric units designed to be operated solely on the 1 600 mm system, at least one of the pantographs to be installed shall have a head geometry type compliant with the specifications                                 given in the clauses 4.2.8.9.2.3a below.]                            

The type(s) of pantograph head geometry that an Electric unit is equipped with shall be recorded in the technical documentation                              defined in clause 4.2.12.2 of this TSI.                           

The width of pantograph head shall not exceed 0,65 metres.

Pantograph heads fitted with contact strips having independent suspensions shall be compliant with the specification referenced                              in Appendix J-1, index 47.                           

Contact between contact wire and pantograph head is permitted outside the contact strips and within the whole conducting range                              over limited line sections under adverse conditions, e.g. coincidence of vehicle swaying and high winds.                           

Conducting range and the minimum length of contact strip are specified below as part of the pantograph head geometry.

###### 4.2.8.2.9.2.1Pantograph head geometry type 1 600 mmU.K.

The pantograph head geometry shall be as depicted in the specification referenced in Appendix J-1, index 48.

###### 4.2.8.2.9.2.2Pantograph head geometry type 1 950 mmU.K.

The pantograph head geometry shall be as depicted in the specification referenced in Appendix J-1, index 49.

Insulated or non-insulated materials for the horns are both permitted.

###### 4.2.8.2.9.2.3Pantograph head geometry type 2 000/2 260 mmU.K.

The profile of the pantograph head shall be as depicted below:

                            

###### [F24.2.8.2.9.3Pantograph head geometry type 1 800 mmU.K.

###### (1)The profile of the pantograph head shall be as depicted below:U.K.

]                   

###### [F14.2.8.2.9.3a]Pantograph current capacity (IC level)U.K.

Pantographs shall be designed for the rated current (as defined in clause 4.2.8.2.4) to be transmitted to the Electric unit.

An analysis shall demonstrate that the pantograph is able to carry the rated current; this analysis shall include the verification                              of the requirements of the specification referenced in Appendix J-1, index 50.                           

Pantographs for DC systems shall be designed for the maximum current at standstill (as defined in clause 4.2.8.2.5 of this                              TSI).                           

###### 4.2.8.2.9.4Contact strip (IC level)U.K.

Contact strips are the replaceable parts of the pantograph head, which are in direct contact with the contact wire.

###### 4.2.8.2.9.4.1Contact strip geometryU.K.

Contact strips shall be geometrically designed to be fitted to one of the pantograph head geometries specified in clause 4.2.8.2.9.2.

###### 4.2.8.2.9.4.2Contact strip materialU.K.

Material used for the contact strips shall be mechanically and electrically compatible with the contact wire material (as                              specified in clause 4.2.14 of the ENE TSI, in order to ensure proper current collection and to avoid excessive abrasion of                              the surface of the contact wires, thereby minimising wear of both contact wires and contact strips.                           

Plain carbon or impregnated carbon with additive material shall be permitted.

Where a metallic additive material is used, the metallic content of the carbon contact strips shall be copper or copper alloy                              and shall not exceed a content of 35 % by weight where used on AC lines and of 40 % where used on DC lines.                           

Pantographs assessed against this TSI shall be fitted with contact strips of a material mentioned above.

Additionally, contact strips of other material or higher percentage of metallic contents or impregnated carbon with cladded                              copper are allowed (if permitted in the infrastructure register) provided that:                           
                -  they are referenced in recognised standards, with mention of restrictions if any, or 
                -  they have been subject to a test of suitability for use (see clause 6.1.3.8). 

###### 4.2.8.2.9.5Pantograph static contact force (IC level)U.K.

The static contact force is the vertical contact force exerted upward by the pantograph head on the contact wire and caused                              by the pantograph-raising device, when the pantograph is raised and the vehicle is at standstill.                           

The static contact force exerted by the pantograph on the contact wire, as defined above, shall be adjustable within at least                              the following ranges (consistent with the area of use of the pantograph):                           
                -  60 N to 90 N for AC supply systems, 
                -  90 N to 120 N for DC 3 kV supply systems, 
                -  70 N to 140 N for DC 1,5 kV supply systems. 

###### 4.2.8.2.9.6Pantograph contact force and dynamic behaviourU.K.

The mean contact force Fm is the statistical mean value of the pantograph contact force, and is formed by the static and aerodynamic components of                              the contact force with dynamic correction.                           

The factors which influence the mean contact force are the pantograph itself, its position in the train consist, its vertical                              extension, and the rolling stock on which the pantograph is mounted.                           

Rolling stock and pantographs fitted on rolling stock are designed to exert a mean contact force Fm on the contact wire in a range specified in clause 4.2.12 of the TSI Energy, in order to ensure current collection quality                              without undue arcing and to limit wear and hazards to contact strips. Adjustment of the contact force is made when dynamic                              tests are performed.                           

The verification at interoperability constituent level shall validate the dynamic behaviour of the pantograph itself, and                              its capability to collect current from a TSI compliant overhead contact line; the conformity assessment procedure specified                              in clause 6.1.3.7.                           

The verification at rolling stock subsystem level (integration in a particular vehicle) shall allow to adjust the contact                              force, taking into account aerodynamic effects due to the rolling stock and the position of the pantograph in the unit or                              train fixed or predefined formation(s); the conformity assessment procedure specified in clause 6.2.3.20.                           

According to the TSI Energy, the range of mean contact force Fm is not harmonised for overhead contact lines designed for                              speed higher than 320 km/h.                           

Therefore electric units can only be assessed against this TSI regarding the dynamic behaviour of the pantograph up to the                              speed of 320 km/h.                           

For the speed range above 320 km/h up to the maximum speed (if higher than 320 km/h), the procedure for innovative solutions                     described in article 10 and Chapter 6 of this TSI shall apply.                  

###### 4.2.8.2.9.7Arrangement of pantographs (RST level)U.K.

It is permissible for more than one pantograph to be simultaneously in contact with the overhead contact line equipment.

The number of pantographs and their spacing shall be designed taking into consideration the requirements of current collection                              performance, as defined in clause 4.2.8.2.9.6 above.                           

Where the spacing of 2 consecutive pantographs in fixed or predefined formations of the assessed unit is less than the spacing                              shown in clause 4.2.13 of the TSI Energy for the selected OCL design distance type, or where more than 2 pantographs are simultaneously                              in contact with the overhead contact line equipment, it shall be demonstrated by testing that the current collection quality                              as defined in clause 4.2.8.2.9.6 above is met for the poorest performing pantograph (identified by simulations to be performed                              prior to that test).                           

The OCL design distance type (A, B or C as defined in the clause 4.2.13 of the TSI Energy) selected (and therefore used for                              the test) shall be recorded in the technical documentation (see clause 4.2.12.2).                           

###### 4.2.8.2.9.8Running through phase or system separation sections (RST level)U.K.

Trains shall be designed to be able to move from one power supply system and from one phase section to an adjacent one (as                              described in clauses 4.2.15 and 4.2.16 of the TSI Energy) without bridging either system or phase separation sections.                           

Electric units designed for several power supply systems shall, when running through system separation sections, recognise                              automatically the voltage of the power supply system at the pantograph.                           

When running through phase or system separation sections, it shall be possible to bring the power consumption of the unit                              to zero. The infrastructure register gives information on the permitted pantographs position: lowered or raised (with permitted                              pantograph arrangements) when running through systems or phase separation sections.                           

Electric units of maximum design speed higher than or equal to 250 km/h shall be fitted with an on-board TCMS (train control                              and monitoring system) able to receive from the ground the information related to the location of the separation section,                              and the subsequent commands to the control of the pantograph and main circuit breaker shall be triggered automatically by                              the TCMS of the unit, without intervention of the driver.                           

Units intended to operate on lines that are fitted with the ETCS track side system for control-command and signalling shall                              be fitted with an on-board TCMS (train control and monitoring system) able to receive from the ETCS system the information                              related to the location of the separation section as described in Annex A, Index 7 of TSI CCS; for units of maximum design                              speed lower than 250 km/h, the subsequent commands are not required to be automatic, but information on section separation                              provided by ETCS shall be displayed on-board for the intervention of the driver.                           

###### 4.2.8.2.9.9Insulation of pantograph from the vehicle (RST level)U.K.

The pantographs shall be assembled on an electric unit in a way that ensures the current path from collector head to vehicle                              equipment is insulated. The insulation shall be adequate for all system voltages the unit is designed for.                           

###### 4.2.8.2.9.10Pantograph lowering (RST level)U.K.

Electric units shall be designed to lower the pantograph in a period meeting the requirements of the specification referenced                              in Appendix J-1, index 51, clause 4.7 (3 seconds) and to the dynamic insulating distance according to the specification referenced                              in Appendix J-1, index 52 either by initiation by the driver or by a train control function (including CCS functions).                           

The pantograph shall lower to the stowed position in less than 10 seconds.

When lowering the pantograph, the main circuit breaker shall previously be opened automatically.

If an electric unit is equipped with an automatic dropping device (ADD) that lowers the pantograph in case of a collector                              head failure, the ADD shall meet the requirements of the specification referenced in Appendix J-1, index 51, clause 4.8.                           

Electric units of maximum design speed higher than 160 km/h shall be equipped with an ADD.

Electric units that require more than one pantograph raised in operation and of maximum design speed higher than 120 km/h                              shall be equipped with an ADD.                           

Other electric units are permitted to be equipped with an ADD.

###### 4.2.8.2.10Electrical protection of the trainU.K.

Electric units shall be protected against internal short – circuits (from inside the unit).

The location of the main circuit breaker shall be such as to protect the on-board high voltage circuits, including any high                              voltage connections between vehicles. The pantograph, the main circuit breaker, and the high voltage connection between them                              shall be located on the same vehicle.                           

Electric units shall protect themselves against short overvoltages, temporary overvoltages and maximum fault current. To meet                              this requirement, electrical protection coordination design of the unit shall comply with the requirements defined in the                              specification referenced in Appendix J-1, index 53.                           

###### 4.2.8.3.*Diesel and other thermal traction system*U.K.

Diesel engines are to comply with the Union legislation concerning exhaust (composition, limit values).

###### 4.2.8.4.*Protection against electrical hazards*U.K.

Rolling stock and its electrically live components shall be designed such that direct or indirect contact with train staff                              and passenger is prevented, both in normal cases and in cases of equipment failure. Provisions described in the specification                              referenced in Appendix J-1, index 54 shall be applied in order to meet this requirement.                           

##### 4.2.9.*Driver's Cab and driver-machine interface*U.K.

The requirements specified in this clause apply to units fitted with a driver's cab.

###### 4.2.9.1.*Driver's Cab*U.K.

###### 4.2.9.1.1GeneralU.K.

The driver's cabs shall be designed to permit operation by a single driver.

The maximum noise level allowed in the cab is specified in the TSI Noise.

###### 4.2.9.1.2Access and egressU.K.

###### 4.2.9.1.2.1Access and egress in operating conditionsU.K.

The driver's cab shall be accessible from both sides of the train from 200 mm below top of rail.

It is permissible for this access to be either directly from the exterior, using a cab external door, or through the area                              at the rear of the cab. In the latter case, requirements defined in this clause shall apply to the external accesses used                              for access to the cab on either side of the vehicle.                           

The means for the train crew to access in and to egress out of the cab, such as footsteps, handrails or opening handles, shall                              allow safe and easy usage by being of dimensions (pitch, width, spacing, shape) to be assessed by reference to recognised                              standards; they shall be designed with consideration of ergonomic criteria in relation with their use. Footsteps shall have                              no sharp edges causing obstacles for the shoes of the train crew.                           

Rolling stock with external walkways shall be equipped with handrails and foot bars (kicking strips) for driver safety when                              accessing the cab.                           

Driver's cab external doors shall open in such a way that they remain within the intended reference profile (see clause 4.2.3.1                              of this TSI) when opened (the unit being at standstill).                           

Driver's cab external doors shall have a minimum clearance of 1 675 × 500 mm when accessible by foot-steps, or of 1 750 ×                              500 mm when accessible on floor level.                           

Interior doors used by the train crew to access the cab shall have a minimum clearance of 1 700 × 430 mm.

For both driver's cab external doors and internal doors, in case they are positioned perpendicular to and against the side                              of the vehicle, it is allowed to have the clearance width in the upper part reduced (angle on the top-outer side) due to the                              gauge of the vehicle; this reduction shall be strictly limited to the gauge constraint in the upper part and shall not lead                              to a clearance width on top side of the door lower than 280 mm.                           

The driver's cab and its access shall be designed so that the train crew is able to prevent the cab being accessed by non-authorised                              persons, whether the cab is occupied or not, and so that a cab occupant is able to go outside of a cab without having to use                              any tool or key.                           

Access to the driver's cab shall be possible without any energy supply available on board. Cab external doors shall not open                              unintentionally.                           

###### 4.2.9.1.2.2Driver's cab emergency exitU.K.

In an emergency situation, evacuation of the train crew from the driver's cab and access to the interior of the cab by the                              rescue services shall be possible on both sides of the cab by using one of the following emergency exit means: cab external                              doors (access directly from the exterior, as defined in clause 4.2.9.1.2.1 above) or side windows or emergency hatches.                           

In all cases, the emergency exit means shall provide a minimum clearance (free area) of 2 000 cm2 with a minimum inner dimension of 400 mm to allow the release of trapped persons.                           

Front position driver's cabs shall have at least an interior exit; this exit shall give access to an area of a minimum length                              of 2 metres, of a minimum clearance identical to those specified in clause 4.2.9.1.2.1, points (7) and (8), and this area                              (including its floor) shall be free of any obstruction to the escape of the driver; the above area shall be located on-board                              the unit, and can be an interior area or an area opened to the outside.                           

###### 4.2.9.1.3External visibilityU.K.

###### 4.2.9.1.3.1Front visibilityU.K.

The driver's cab shall be designed to allow the driver at his seated driving position a clear and unobstructed line of sight                              in order to distinguish fixed signals set to both the left and right of a straight track, and in curves with a radius of 300                              m or more, under the conditions defined in Appendix F.                           

The above requirement shall also be met from the standing driving position under conditions defined in the Appendix F, on                              locomotives and on driving coaches, in case these coaches are intended to be also operated by a driver in standing position.                           

For locomotives with central cab and for OTMs, in order to ensure the visibility of low signals, it is permitted that the                              driver moves to several different positions in the cab in order to meet the above requirement; it is not required to meet                              the requirement from the seated driving position.                           

###### 4.2.9.1.3.2Rear and side viewU.K.

The cab shall be designed to allow the driver to have a rear view of each side of the train at stand still; this requirement                              is permitted to be met by one of the following means: opening side windows or panel at each side of the cab, exterior mirrors,                              camera system.                           

In case of opening side windows or panel used as that means to meet the requirement above in point (1), the opening shall                              be sufficiently large for the driver to put his head through the aperture; additionally, for locomotives and driving coaches                              intended to be used in a train composition with a locomotive, the design shall allow the driver at the same time to operate                              the emergency brake.                           

###### 4.2.9.1.4Interior layoutU.K.

The interior layout of the cab shall take into account the anthropometric measurements of the driver as set out in the Appendix                              E.                           

Freedom of movement of personnel in the cab interior shall not be inhibited by obstructions.

The cab floor corresponding to the working area of the driver (access to the cab and foot rest excluded) shall be without                              any step.                           

The interior layout shall allow both seated and standing driving positions on locomotives and on driving coaches, in case                              these coaches are intended to be also operated by a driver in standing position.                           

The cab shall be equipped with at least one driver's seat (see clause 4.2.9.1.5) and additionally with a seat not considered                              as a driving position for possible accompanying crew.                           

###### 4.2.9.1.5Driver's seatU.K.

**Requirements at component level:**                   

The driver's seat shall be designed in such a way that it allows him to undertake all normal driving functions in a seated                              position, taking into account the anthropometric measurements of the driver as set out in the Appendix E. It shall allow for                              correct posture of the driver from the physiological point of view.                           

It shall be possible for the driver to adjust the seat position in order to meet the reference position of eyes for external                              visibility, as defined in clause 4.2.9.1.3.1.                           

Ergonomics and health aspects shall be considered in the design of the seat, and its use by the driver.

**Requirements for integration in the driver's cab:**                   

The mounting of the seat in the cab shall allow to meet external visibility requirements as specified in clause 4.2.9.1.3.1                              above by using the range of adjustment provided by the seat (at component level); it shall not alter ergonomics and health                              aspects and the use of the seat by the driver.                           

The seat shall not constitute an obstacle for the driver to escape in case of emergency.

The mounting of the driver's seat in locomotives, and in driving coaches, in case these coaches are intended to also be operated                              by a driver in standing position shall allow adjustment to get the necessary free space needed for the standing driving position.                           

###### 4.2.9.1.6Driver's desk — ErgonomicsU.K.

The driver's desk and its operating equipment and controls shall be arranged to enable, in the most commonly used driving                              position, the driver to keep a normal posture, without hampering his freedom of movement, taking into account the anthropometric                              measurements of the driver as set out in the Appendix E.                           

To allow the display on the driver's desk surface of paper documents required during driving, a reading zone of minimum size                              30 cm width per 21 cm high shall be available in front of the driver's seat.                           

Operating and control elements shall be clearly marked, so that they are identifiable by the driver.

If the traction and/or braking effort is set-up by a lever (combined one or separated ones), the ‘tractive effort’ shall increase                              by pushing the lever forwards, and the ‘braking effort’ shall increase by drawing the lever towards the driver.                           

If there is a position for emergency braking, it shall be clearly distinguished from those of the other positions of the lever                     (e.g. by a notch).                  

###### 4.2.9.1.7Climate control and air qualityU.K.

The air in the cab shall be renewed to keep the CO2 concentration to the levels specified in the clause 4.2.5.8 of this TSI.                           

At the seated driving position (as defined in the clause 4.2.9.1.3) of the driver's head and shoulders, there shall be no                              air flows caused by the ventilation system having an air velocity exceeding the limit value recognised to ensure a proper                              working environment.                           

###### 4.2.9.1.8Internal lightingU.K.

Cab general lighting shall be provided on driver's command in all normal operational modes of the rolling stock (included                              ‘switched off’). Its luminosity on desk level shall be higher than 75 lux at the level of the driver's desk, except for OTMs                              for which it shall be higher than 60 lux.                           

Independent lighting of the driver's desk reading zone shall be provided on driver's command, and shall be adjustable up to                              a value higher than 150 lux.                           

An independent lighting of instruments shall be provided, and shall be adjustable.

In order to prevent any dangerous confusion with outside operational signalling, no green lights or green illumination are                              permitted in a driver's cab, except for existing class B cab signalling systems (as defined in the CCS TSI).                           

###### 4.2.9.2.*Windscreen*U.K.

###### 4.2.9.2.1.Mechanical characteristicsU.K.

The dimension, location, shape and finishes (including those for maintenance purpose) of the windows shall not inhibit the                              drivers external view (as defined in clause 4.2.9.1.3.1) and shall support the driving task.                           

The driver's cab windscreens shall be able to resist impacts from projectiles as specified in the specification referenced                              in Appendix J-1, index 55, clause 4.2.7 and shall resist spalling as specified in the same specification, clause 4.2.9.                           

###### 4.2.9.2.2.Optical characteristicsU.K.

The driver's cab windscreens shall be of an optical quality that does not alter the visibility of signs (shape and colour)                              in any operating condition (including as example when the windscreen is heated to prevent misting and frost).                           

The angle between primary and secondary images in the installed position shall be in accordance with limit values specified                              in the specification referenced in Appendix J-1, index 56, clause 4.2.2.                           

Permissible optical distortions of vision shall be as specified in the specification referenced in Appendix J-1, index 56,                              clause 4.2.3.                           

Haze shall be as specified in the specification referenced in Appendix J-1, index 56, clause 4.2.4.

Luminous transmittance shall be as specified in the specification referenced in Appendix J-1, index 56, clause 4.2.5.

Chromaticity shall be as specified in the specification referenced in Appendix J-1, index 56, clause 4.2.6.

###### 4.2.9.2.3EquipmentU.K.

The windscreen shall be equipped with de-icing, de-misting and external cleaning means, under control of the driver.

The location, type and quality of windscreen cleaning and clearance devices shall ensure that the driver is able to maintain                              a clear external view in most weather and operating conditions, and shall not inhibit the drivers external view.                           

Protection shall be provided from the sun without reducing the drivers' view of external signs, signals and other visual information                              when this protection is in its stowed position.                           

###### 4.2.9.3.*Driver machine interface*U.K.

###### 4.2.9.3.1.Driver's activity control functionU.K.

The driver's cab shall be equipped with a means to monitor the driver's activity, and to automatically stop the train when                              a lack of driver's activity is detected. This gives the on-board technical means for the railway undertaking to fulfil the                              requirement of clause 4.2.2.9 of TSI OPE.                           

**Specification of the means to monitor (and detect a lack of) the driver's activity:**                            

The driver's activity shall be monitored when the train is in driving configuration and is moving (criterion for movement                              detection is at a low speed threshold); this monitoring shall be done by controlling the action of the driver on recognised                              driver interfaces such as dedicated devices (e.g. pedal, push buttons, sensitive touches...) and/or recognised driver interfaces                              with the Train Control and Monitoring System.                           

When no action is monitored on any of the recognised driver interfaces during more than a time of X seconds, a lack of driver's                              activity shall be triggered.                           

The system shall allow for the adjustment (at workshop, as a maintenance activity) of the time X within the range of 5 seconds                              to 60 seconds.                           

When the same action is monitored continuously for more than a time not higher than 60 seconds without any further action                              on a recognised driver interface, a lack of driver's activity shall also be triggered.                           

Before triggering a lack of driver's activity, a warning shall be given to the driver, in order for him to have the possibility                              to react and reset the system.                           

The system shall have the information ‘lack of driver's activity triggered’ available for being interfaced to other systems                              (i.e. the radio system).                           

**Additional requirement:**                            

The detection of the lack of the driver's activity is a function that shall be subject to a reliability study considering                              the failure mode of components, redundancies, software, periodic checks and other provisions, and the estimated failure rate                              of the function (lack of driver's activity as specified above not detected) shall be provided in the technical documentation                              defined in clause 4.2.12.                           

**Specification of actions triggered at train level when a lack of driver's activity is detected:**                            

A lack of driver's activity when the train is in driving configuration and is moving (criterion for movement detection is                              at a low speed threshold) shall lead to a full service brake or an emergency brake application on the train.                           

In case of application of a full service brake, its effective application shall be automatically controlled and in case of                              non-application, it shall be followed by an emergency brake.                           

**Notes:**                            
                -  It is allowed to have the function described in this clause fulfilled by the CCS Subsystem. 
                -  The value of the time X has to be defined and justified by the railway undertaking (application of TSI OPE and CSM, and consideration                                    of its current code of practice or means of compliance; outside of scope of the present TSI).                                  
                -  As a transitional measure, it is also allowed to install a system of a fix time X (no adjustment possible) provided that the                                    time X is within the range of 5 seconds to 60 seconds and that the railway undertaking can justify this fix time (as described                                    above).                                  
                -  A Member State may impose to the railway undertakings operating on its territory to adjust their rolling stock with a maximum                                    limit for time X, if the Member state can demonstrate that this is needed to preserve the national safety level. In all other                                    cases, Member States cannot prevent the access of a railway undertaking that is using a higher time Z (within the range specified).                                  

###### 4.2.9.3.2.Speed indicationU.K.

This function and the corresponding conformity assessment are specified in the TSI CCS.

###### 4.2.9.3.3Driver display unit and screensU.K.

Functional requirements concerning the information and commands provided in the driver's cab are specified together with other                              requirements applicable to the specific function, in the clause describing that function. The same applies also to information                              and commands that may be provided by means of display units and screens.                           

ERTMS information and commands, including those provided on a display unit, are specified in the TSI CCS.

For functions in the scope of this TSI, the information or commands to be used by the driver to control and command the train,                              and given by means of display units or screens, shall be designed to allow proper use and reaction from the driver.                           

###### 4.2.9.3.4.Controls and indicatorsU.K.

Functional requirements are specified with other requirements applicable to a specific function, in the clause describing                              that function.                           

All indicator lights shall be designed so that they can be read correctly under natural or artificial lighting conditions,                              including incidental lighting.                           

Possible reflections of illuminated indicators and buttons in the windows of the driver's cab shall not interfere with the                              line of sight of the driver in his normal working position.                           

In order to prevent any dangerous confusion with outside operational signalling, no green lights or green illumination are                              permitted in a driver's cab, except for existing class B cab signalling system (according TSI CCS).                           

Audible information generated by on-board equipment inside the cab for the driver shall be at least 6 dB(A) above the noise                              level in the cab (this noise level taken as reference being measured under conditions specified in the TSI Noise).                           

###### 4.2.9.3.5.LabellingU.K.

The following information shall be indicated in the driving cabs:
                -  Max. speed (Vmax), 
                -  Identification number of rolling stock (traction vehicle number), 
                -  Location of portable equipment (e.g. self-rescue device, signals), 
                -  Emergency exit. 

Harmonised pictograms shall be used to mark controls and indicators in the cab.

###### 4.2.9.3.6Radio Remote control function by staff for shunting operationU.K.

If a radio remote control function is provided for a staff member to control the unit during shunting operations, it shall                              be designed to allow him to control the train movement safely, and to avoid any mistake when used.                           

It is assumed that the staff member using the remote control function can visually detect train movement when using the remote                              control device.                           

The design of the remote control function, including safety aspects, shall be assessed according to recognised standards.

###### 4.2.9.4.*On-board tools and portable equipment*U.K.

A space shall be available in or near the driver's cab to store the following equipment, in case they are needed by the driver                              in emergency situation:                           
                -  Hand-lamp with red and white light 
                -  Short circuiting equipment for track-circuits 
                -  Scotches, if the parking brake performance is not sufficient depending on track gradient (see clause 4.2.4.5.5 ‘Parking brake’). 
                -  A fire extinguisher (to be located in the cab; see also clause 4.2.10.3.1). 
                -  On manned traction units of freight trains: a self-rescue device, as specified in the SRT TSI (see SRT TSI clause 4.7.1). 

###### 4.2.9.5.*Storage facility for staff personal effects*U.K.

Each driver's cab shall be equipped with:
                -  Two hooks for clothing or a niche with a clothes beam. 
                -  A free space for storing a suitcase or bag of size 300 mm × 400 mm × 400 mm. 

###### 4.2.9.6.*Recording device*U.K.

The list of information to be recorded is defined in the TSI OPE.

The unit shall be equipped with a means to record this information, complying with the following requirements:

Functional requirements specified in the specification referenced in Appendix J-1, index 57, clauses 4.2.1, 4.2.2, 4.2.3 and                              4.2.4 shall be met.                           

Recording performance shall be according to class R1 of the specification referenced in Appendix J-1, index 57, clause 4.3.1.2.2.

The integrity (consistency; correctness) of the recorded and extracted data shall be according to the specification referenced                              in Appendix J-1, index 57, clause 4.3.1.4.                           

Data integrity shall be safeguarded according to the specification referenced in Appendix J-1, index 57, clause 4.3.1.5.

The level of protection that applies to the protected storage medium shall be ‘A’ as defined in the specification referenced                              in Appendix J-1, index 57, clause 4.3.1.7.                           

##### 4.2.10.*Fire safety and evacuation*U.K.

###### 4.2.10.1.*General and Categorisation*U.K.

This clause applies to all units.

Rolling stock shall be designed such that it protects passengers and on-board staff in case of hazard fire on board and to                              allow an effective evacuation and rescue in case of emergencies. This is deemed to be fulfilled by complying with the requirements                              of this TSI.                           

The category of the unit regarding fire safety considered for its design, as defined in clause 4.1.4 of this TSI shall be                              recorded in the technical documentation described in clause 4.2.12 of this TSI.                           

###### 4.2.10.2.*Measures to prevent fire*U.K.

###### 4.2.10.2.1Material requirementsU.K.

The selection of materials and components shall take into account their fire behaviour properties, such as flammability, smoke                              opacity and toxicity.                           

Materials used to construct the rolling stock unit shall comply with the requirements of the specification referenced in Appendix                              J-1, index 58 for the ‘Operation Category’ as defined below:                           
                -  ‘Operation Category 2’ for Category A passenger rolling stock (including passenger locomotive). 
                -  ‘Operation Category 3’ for Category B passenger rolling stock (including passenger locomotive). 
                -  ‘Operation Category 2’ for freight locomotives, and self-propelling units designed to carry other payload (mail, freight,                                    etc.).                                  
                -  ‘Operation Category 1’ for OTMs, with requirements limited to areas which are accessible to staff when the unit is in transport                                    running configuration (see Section 2.3 of this TSI).                                  

In order to ensure constant product characteristics and manufacturing process, it is required that:
                -  the certificate to prove compliance of a material with the standard, which shall be issued immediately after testing of this                                    material, shall be reviewed every 5 years,                                  
                -  in case there is no change in the product characteristics and manufacturing process, and no change in the requirements (TSI),                                    it is not required to perform new testing of this material; the certificate needs only to be updated regarding its date of                                    issue.                                  

###### 4.2.10.2.2Specific measures for flammable liquidsU.K.

Railway vehicles shall be provided with measures preventing a fire from occurring and spreading due to leakage of flammable                              liquids or gases.                           

Flammable liquids used as cooling medium in high voltage equipment of freight locomotives shall be compliant to the requirement                              R14 of the specification referenced in Appendix J-1, index 59.                           

###### 4.2.10.2.3Hot axle box detectionU.K.

Requirements are specified in clause 4.2.3.3.2 of the present TSI.

###### 4.2.10.3.*Measures to detect/control fire*U.K.

###### 4.2.10.3.1Portable Fire extinguishersU.K.

This clause is applicable to units designed to carry passengers and/or staff.

The unit shall be equipped with adequate and sufficient portable fire extinguishers, in passenger and/or staff areas.

Water plus additive type fire extinguishers are deemed to be adequate for on-board rolling stock purposes.

###### 4.2.10.3.2Fire detection systemsU.K.

The equipment and the areas on rolling stock that intrinsically impose a fire risk shall be equipped with a system that will                              detect fire at an early stage.                           

Upon fire detection the driver shall be notified and appropriate automatic actions shall be initiated to minimize the subsequent                              risk to passengers and train staff.                           

For sleeping compartments, the detection of a fire shall activate an acoustic and optical local alarm in the affected area.                              The acoustic signal shall be sufficient to wake up the passengers. The optical signal shall be clearly visible and shall not                              be hidden by obstacles.                           

###### 4.2.10.3.3Fire automatic fighting system for freight diesel unitsU.K.

This clause is applicable to diesel powered freight locomotives and diesel powered freight self-propelling units.

These units shall be equipped with an automatic system capable of detecting a diesel fuel fire and of shutting down all relevant                              equipment and cutting off the fuel supply.                           

###### 4.2.10.3.4Fire containment and control systems for passenger rolling stockU.K.

This clause is applicable to units of category B passenger rolling stock.

The unit shall be equipped with adequate measures to control the spread of heat and fire effluents through the train.

The conformity with this requirement shall be deemed to be satisfied by the verification of conformity to the following requirements:
                -  The unit shall be equipped with full cross section partitions within passenger/staff areas of each vehicle, with a maximum                                    separation of 30 meters which shall satisfy requirements for integrity for a minimum of 15 minutes (assuming the fire can                                    start from either side of the partition), or with other Fire Containment and Control Systems (FCCS).                                  
                -  The unit shall be equipped with fire barriers that shall satisfy requirements for integrity and heat insulation for a minimum                                    of 15 minutes at the following locations (where relevant for the concerned unit):                                                     -  Between the drivers cab and the compartment to the rear of it (assuming the fire starts in the rear compartment). 
                  -  Between combustion engine and adjacent passenger/staff areas (assuming the fire starts in the combustion engine). 
                  -  Between compartments with electrical supply line and/or traction circuit equipment and passenger/staff area (assuming the                                          fire starts in the electrical supply line and/or the traction circuit equipment). 
                -  The test shall be carried out in accordance with the requirements of the specification referenced in Appendix J-1, index 60. 

If other FCCS are used instead of full cross section partitions within passenger/staff areas, the following requirements shall                              apply:                           
                -  They shall be installed in each vehicle of the unit, which is intended to carry passengers and/or staff, 
                -  They shall ensure that fire and smoke will not extend in dangerous concentrations over a length of more than 30 m within the                                    passenger/staff areas inside the unit, for at least 15 minutes after the start of a fire.                                  

The assessment of this parameter is an open point.

If other FCCS are used and rely on reliability and availability of systems, components, or functions, they shall be subject                              to a reliability study considering the failure mode of components, redundancies, software, periodic checks and other provisions,                              and the estimated failure rate of the function (lack of control of the spread of heat and fire effluents) shall be provided                              in the technical documentation described in clause 4.2.12.                           

Based on this study, operating and maintenance conditions of the FCCS shall be defined and provided in the maintenance and                     operating documentation described in clauses 4.2.12.3 and 4.2.12.4.                  

###### 4.2.10.3.5Fire spreading protection measures for freight locomotives and freight self-propelling unitsU.K.

This clause is applicable to freight locomotives and to freight self-propelling units.

These units shall have a fire barrier to protect the driver's cab.

These fire barriers shall satisfy requirements for integrity and heat insulation for a minimum of 15 minutes; they shall be                              subject to a test carried out in accordance with the requirements of the specification referenced in Appendix J-1, index 61.                           

###### 4.2.10.4.*Requirements related to emergencies*U.K.

###### 4.2.10.4.1.Emergency lightingU.K.

To provide protection and safety on board in the event of emergency the trains shall be equipped with an emergency lighting                              system. This system shall provide a suitable lighting level in the passenger and in the service areas, as follows:                           

for units of maximum design speed higher than or equal to 250 km/h, during a minimum operating time of three hours after the                              main energy supply has failed,                           

for units of maximum design speed lower than 250 km/h, during a minimum operating time of 90 minutes after the main energy                              supply has failed.                           

Lighting level of at least 5 lux at floor level.

Values of lighting level for specific areas and conformity assessment methods shall be as specified in the specification referenced                              in Appendix J-1, index 62.                           

In the event of fire, the emergency lighting system shall continue to sustain at least 50 % of the emergency lighting in the                              vehicles not affected by fire for a minimum of 20 minutes. This requirement shall be deemed to be fulfilled by a satisfactory                              failure mode analysis.                           

###### 4.2.10.4.2Smoke ControlU.K.

This clause is applicable to all units. In case of fire, the distribution of fumes shall be minimised in areas occupied by                              passengers and/or staff by application of the following requirements:                           

To prevent outside smoke from entering the unit, it shall be possible to switch off or close all means of external ventilation.

This requirement is verified on the rolling stock subsystem at unit level.

To prevent smoke that could be inside a vehicle from spreading, it shall be possible to switch off the ventilation and recirculation                              at vehicle level, this may be achieved by switching off the ventilation.                           

It is permissible to trigger these actions manually by the on-board staff, or by remote control; the triggering is permitted                              to be at train level, or at vehicle level.                           

For units intended to operate on lines that are fitted with the ETCS track side system for control-command and signalling                              (including ‘airtightness’ information as described in Annex A, Index 7 of TSI CCS), the unit on-board control system shall                              be able to receive from the ETCS system the information related to airtightness.                           

###### 4.2.10.4.3Passenger alarm and communication meansU.K.

Requirements are specified in clauses 4.2.5.2, 4.2.5.3 and 4.2.5.4 of the present TSI.

###### 4.2.10.4.4Running capabilityU.K.

This clause is applicable to category A and category B passenger rolling stock (including passenger locomotives).

The unit shall be designed so that, in the event of fire on-board, the running capability of the train will enable it to run                              to a suitable firefighting point.                           

Compliance shall be demonstrated by application of the specification referenced in Appendix J-1, index 63, in which the system                              functions impacted by a ‘type 2’ fire shall be:                           
                -  braking for rolling stock of fire safety category A: this function shall be assessed for a duration of 4 minutes. 
                -  braking and traction for rolling stock of fire safety category B: these functions shall be assessed for a duration of 15 minutes                                    at a minimum speed of 80 km/h.                                  

###### 4.2.10.5.*Requirements related to evacuation*U.K.

###### 4.2.10.5.1.Passenger emergency exitsU.K.

This section is applicable to units designed to carry passengers.

###### **Definitions and clarifications**U.K.

Emergency exit: train borne provision to allow people inside the train to get out of the train in case of an emergency. An                              external passenger door is a specific type of emergency exit.                           

Through route: route through the train which can be entered and exited from different ends and which permits the movement                              of passengers and staff, along the longitudinal axis of the train without obstruction. Interior doors on the through route                              which are intended to be used by passengers in normal service and which can also be opened in case of power failure are considered                              not to obstruct the movement of passengers and staff.                           

Passenger area: area to which passengers have access without particular authorisation.

Compartment: Passenger area or staff area, which cannot be used as a through route for passengers or staff respectively.

###### **Requirements**U.K.

Emergency exits shall be provided in sufficient quantity along through route(s) on both sides of the unit; they shall be indicated.                              They shall be accessible and sufficient in size to allow the release of persons.                           

An emergency exit shall be able to be opened by a passenger from inside the train.

All external passenger doors shall be equipped with emergency opening devices allowing them to be used as emergency exits                              (see clause 4.2.5.5.9).                           

Each vehicle designed to contain up to 40 passengers shall have at least two emergency exits.

Each vehicle designed to contain more than 40 passengers shall have at least three emergency exits.

Each vehicle intended to carry passengers shall have at least one emergency exit on each vehicle side.

The number of the doors and their dimensions shall allow the complete evacuation within three minutes by passengers without                              their baggage. It is permitted to consider that passengers with reduced mobility are to be assisted by other passengers or                              staff, and that wheelchair users are evacuated without their wheelchair.                           

Verification of this requirement shall be made by a physical test under normal operating conditions.

###### 4.2.10.5.2Driver's cab emergency exitsU.K.

Requirements are specified in clause 4.2.9.1.2.2 of the present TSI.

##### 4.2.11.*Servicing*U.K.

###### 4.2.11.1.*General*U.K.

Servicing and minor repairs necessary to ensure safe operations between maintenance interventions shall be able to be carried                              out while the train is stabled away from its normal servicing home base.                           

This part gathers requirements for provisions relating to the servicing of trains during operation or when stabled on a network.                              Most of these requirements aim at ensuring that rolling stock will have the equipment necessary to meet the provisions required                              in the other sections of this TSI and of the TSI Infrastructure.                           

Trains shall be capable of remaining stabled, with no crew onboard, with power supply from the catenary or auxiliary power                              supply maintained for lighting, air conditioning, refrigerated cabinets, etc.                           

###### 4.2.11.2.*Train exterior cleaning*U.K.

###### 4.2.11.2.1Cleaning of driver's cab windscreenU.K.

This clause is applicable to all units equipped with a driver's cab

It shall be possible for the front windows of drivers' cabs to be cleaned from outside the train without need to remove any                              component or covering.                           

###### 4.2.11.2.2Exterior cleaning through a washing plantU.K.

This clause is applicable to units fitted with traction equipment that are intended to be cleaned externally through a washing                              plant.                           

It shall be possible to control the speed of trains that are intended to be cleaned externally through a washing plant on                              level track at a value between 2 km/h and 5 km/h. This requirement is aimed at ensuring compatibility with washing plants.                           

###### 4.2.11.3.*Connection to Toilet discharge system*U.K.

This clause is applicable to units equipped with sealed retention systems (using clear or recycled water) that have to be                              emptied at sufficient intervals on a scheduled basis at designated depots.                           

The following connections of the unit to the toilet discharge system shall comply with the following specifications:
                -  The 3 Evacuation nozzle (Inner part): see Appendix G-1. 
                -  The flushing connection for the toilet tank (Inner part), the use of which is optional: see Appendix G-1. 

###### 4.2.11.4.*Water refilling equipment*U.K.

This clause is applicable to units equipped with water taps covered by the clause 4.2.5.1 of this TSI.

The water supplied to the train, up to the filling-interface with the rolling stock, on the interoperable network is deemed                              to be drinking water in accordance with Directive 98/83/EC, as specified in the clause 4.2.12.4 of the TSI INF.                           

The on-board storage equipment shall not induce any additional risk for the health of people to the risks associated with                     the storage of water filled in accordance with the above provisions. This requirement is deemed to be met by assessment of                     piping and sealing material and quality. The materials shall be suitable for transport and storage of water fit for human                     consumption.                  

###### 4.2.11.5.*Interface for water refilling*U.K.

This clause is applicable to units equipped with a water tank supplying water to sanitary systems covered by the clause 4.2.5.1                              of this TSI.                           

The inlet connection for water tanks shall comply with figure 1of the specification referenced in Appendix J-1, index 64.

###### 4.2.11.6.*Special requirements for stabling of trains*U.K.

This clause is applicable to units intended to be powered while stabled,

The unit shall be compatible with at least one of the following external power supply systems, and shall be equipped (where                              relevant) with the corresponding interface for electrical connection to that external power supply (plug),                           

Power supply contact line (see clause 4.2.8.2.9 ‘Requirements linked to pantograph’),

[F1‘Single pole’ power supply line (AC 1 kV, AC/DC 1,5 kV, DC 3 kV), in accordance with the specification referenced in Appendix J-1, index                                 111,]                            

Local external auxiliary power supply 400 V that can be connected to socket type ‘3P+ground’ according to the specification                              referenced in Appendix J-1, index 65.                           

###### 4.2.11.7.*Refuelling equipment*U.K.

This clause is applicable to units equipped with a refuelling system.

Trains using diesel fuel in accordance with Annex II of Directive 2009/30/EC of the European Parliament and of the Council(12) shall be equipped with refuelling couplings on both sides of the vehicle, at a maximum height of 1 500 mm above rail level;                              they shall be circular with a minimum diameter of 70 mm.                           

Trains using another type of diesel fuel shall be equipped with a foolproof opening and fuel tank to prevent inadvertent refuelling                              with a wrong fuel.                           

The type of coupling for refuelling shall be recorded in the technical documentation.

###### 4.2.11.8.*Train interior cleaning — power supply*U.K.

For units of maximum speed higher than or equal to 250 km/h, a 3 000 VA at 230V, 50Hz electrical power supply connection shall                              be provided inside the unit; they shall be spaced such that no part of the unit that needs to be cleaned is more than 12 metres                              from one of the sockets.                           

##### 4.2.12.*Documentation for operation and maintenance*U.K.

The requirements specified in this clause 4.2.12 apply to all units.

###### 4.2.12.1.*General*U.K.

This clause 4.2.12 of the TSI describes the documentation requested in [F1clause 2.4(a) of Annex IV of Directive (EU) 2016/797] (clause titled ‘Technical file’): ‘*technical characteristics linked to the design including general and detailed drawings with respect to execution, electrical                                 and hydraulic diagrams, control-circuit diagrams, description of data-processing and automatic systems, documentation on operation                                 and maintenance, etc., relevant for the subsystem concerned.*’                           

[F1This documentation, being part of the technical file, is compiled by the applicant and has to accompany the EC declaration                                 of verification. It is kept by the applicant throughout the service life of the subsystem.]                            

[F2The applicant or any entity authorised by the applicant (e.g. a keeper) shall provide the part of this documentation required                                 to manage the maintenance documentation as defined in the art 14(3)(b) of Directive (EU) 2016/798 of the European Parliament                                 and of the Council (13)  to the entity in charge of maintenance as soon as it is assigned for the maintenance of the unit.]                            

[F1The documentation also includes a list of safety critical components. Safety critical components are components for which                                 a single failure has a credible potential to lead directly to a serious accident as defined in Article 3(12) of Directive                                 (EU) 2016/798.                            

The content of the documentation is described in the clauses below.]                            

###### 4.2.12.2.*General documentation*U.K.

The following documentation describing the rolling stock shall be provided:

General drawings.

Electrical, pneumatic and hydraulic diagrams, Control-circuit diagrams necessary to explain the function and operation of                              the concerned systems.                           

Description of computerised on-board systems including description of functionality, specification of interfaces and data                              processing and protocols.                           

[F2For units designed and assessed for general operation, this shall include a description of the electric interfaces between                                 units and of communication protocols, with the reference to the standards or other normative documents that have been applied.                                 Communication protocols (if used) shall comply with the specification referenced in Appendix J-1, index 112.]                            

Reference profile, and compliance to interoperable reference contours G1, GA, GB, GC or DE3, as required in clause 4.2.3.1.

Weight balance with hypothesis on load conditions considered, as required in clause 4.2.2.10.

Axle load and spacing of axles, as required in clause 4.2.3.2.1.

Test report concerning running dynamic behaviour, including the test track quality recording and the track loading parameters                              including possible limitations of use if testing of the vehicle only covers a part of the test conditions, as required in                              clause 4.2.3.4.2.                           

The hypothesis taken to evaluate the loads due to bogie running, as required in clauses 4.2.3.5.1 and in clause 6.2.3.7 for                              wheelsets.                           

Braking performance, including failure mode analysis (degraded mode) as required in clause 4.2.4.5.

[F2Maximum distance between the eddy current track brake and the track corresponding to ‘brake released’, fixed speed threshold, vertical force and braking force as a function of the train speed, for the case of full application                                 of eddy current track brake (emergency braking) and limited application of eddy current brake (service braking), as required                                 in clause 4.2.4.8.3.]                            

The presence and type of toilets in a unit, the characteristics of the flushing medium, if it is not clean water, the nature                              of the treatment system for released water and the standards against which conformity has been assessed, as required in clause                              4.2.5.1.                           

Provisions taken in relation with the selected range of environmental parameters if different than the nominal one, as required                              in clause 4.2.6.1.                           

Characteristic wind curve (CWC) as required in clause 4.2.6.2.4.

Traction performance, as required in clause 4.2.8.1.1.

[F4Fitment of an on-board energy measurement system, and of its on-board location function (optional), as required in clause                                 4.2.8.2.8. Description of on-board to ground communication and the metrological control including functions related to the                                 accuracy classes of the voltage measurement, current measurement and energy calculation.]                            

Hypothesis and data considered for the compatibility study for AC systems, as required in clause 4.2.8.2.7.

The number of pantographs simultaneously in contact with the overhead contact line equipment (OCL), their spacing and the                              OCL design distance type (A, B or C) used for assessment tests, as required in clause 4.2.8.2.9.7.                           

###### 4.2.12.3.*Documentation related to Maintenance*U.K.

Maintenance is a set of activities intended to keep a functional unit in, or to restore it to, a state in which it can perform                              its required function, ensuring continued integrity of safety systems and compliance with applicable standards.                           

The following information necessary to undertake maintenance activities on rolling stock shall be provided:

[F1The maintenance design justification file: explains how maintenance activities are defined and designed in order to ensure                                 that the rolling stock characteristics will be kept within acceptable limits of use during its lifetime.                            

The maintenance design justification file shall give input data in order to determine the criteria for inspection and the                                 periodicity of maintenance activities.]                            

[F1The maintenance description file: explains how maintenance activities are recommended to be performed.]                            

###### 4.2.12.3.1The maintenance design justification fileU.K.

The maintenance design justification file shall contain:

Precedents, principles and methods used to design the maintenance of the unit.

[F2Precedents, principles and methods used to identify the safety critical components and their specific operational, servicing,                                 maintenance and traceability requirements.]                            

Utilisation profile: Limits of the normal use of the unit (e.g. km/month, climatic limits, authorised types of loads etc.).

Relevant data used to design the maintenance and origin of these data (return of experience).

Tests, investigations and calculations carried out to design the maintenance.

Resultant means (facilities, tools...) needed for the maintenance are described in clause 4.2.12.3.2 ‘maintenance documentation’.

###### 4.2.12.3.2The Maintenance description fileU.K.

The maintenance description file shall describe how maintenance activities shall be conducted.

Maintenance activities include all activities necessary such as inspections, monitoring, tests, measurements, replacements,                              adjustments, repairs.                           

Maintenance activities are split into:
                -  Preventive maintenance; scheduled and controlled 
                -  Corrective maintenance. 

The maintenance description file shall include the following:

Component hierarchy and functional description: The hierarchy sets up the boundaries of the rolling stock by listing all the                              items belonging to the product structure of that rolling stock and using an appropriate number of discrete levels. The lowest                              item of the hierarchy shall be a replaceable unit.                           

Schematic circuit diagrams, connection diagrams and wiring diagrams

Parts list: The parts list shall contain the technical and functional descriptions of the spare parts (replaceable units).

The list shall include all parts specified for changing on condition, or which may require replacement following electrical                              or mechanical malfunction, or which will foreseeable require replacement after accidental damage (e.g. windscreen).                           

Interoperability constituent shall be indicated and referenced to their corresponding declaration of conformity.

[F2Safety critical components list: The safety critical components list shall contain the specific servicing, maintenance and                                 servicing/maintenance traceability requirements.]                            

The limit values for components which shall not be exceeded in service shall be stated; the possibility of specifying operational                              restrictions in degraded mode (limit value reached) is permitted.                           

European legal obligations: where components or systems are subject to specific European legal obligations these obligations                              shall be listed.                           

The structured set of tasks that include the activities, procedures, means proposed by the applicant to carry out the maintenance                              task.                           

The description of the maintenance activities.

The following aspects have to be documented (when they are specific to the application):
                -  Disassembly/assembly instructions drawings necessary for correct assembly/disassembly of replaceable parts 
                -  Maintenance criteria 
                -  Checks and tests 
                -  Tools and materials required to undertake the task (special tools) 
                -  Consumables required to undertake the task 
                -  Personal protective safety provision and equipment (special). 

Necessary tests and procedures to be undertaken after each maintenance operation before re-entry into service of rolling stock.

Troubleshooting (fault diagnosis) manuals or facilities for all reasonably foreseeable situations; this includes functional                              and schematic diagrams of the systems or IT-based fault finding systems.                           

###### 4.2.12.4.*Operating documentation*U.K.

The technical documentation necessary to operate the unit is composed of:

[F1A description of operation in normal mode, including the operational characteristics and limitations of the unit (e.g. vehicle                                 gauge, maximum design speed, axle loads, brake performance, type(s) and operation of track gauge changeover facility(ies)                                 the unit is compatible with...).]                            

A description of the various reasonably foreseeable degraded modes in case of safety significant failures of equipment or                              functions described in this TSI, together with the related acceptable limits and operating conditions of the unit that could                              be experienced.                           

A description of the control and monitoring systems allowing the identification of safety significant failures of equipment                              or functions described in this TSI (e.g. clause 4.2.4.9 related to the function ‘braking’).                           

[F2Safety critical components list: The safety critical components list shall contain the specific operational and traceability                                 requirements.]                            

This technical operating documentation shall be part of the technical file.

###### 4.2.12.5.*Lifting diagram and instructions*U.K.

The documentation shall include:

A description of procedures for lifting and jacking and related instructions.

A description of interfaces for lifting and jacking.

###### 4.2.12.6.*Rescue related descriptions*U.K.

The documentation shall include:

A description of procedures for use of emergency measures and related necessary precautions to be taken, as e.g. use of emergency                              exits, entrance to RST for rescue, isolation of brakes, electrical earthing, towing.                           

A description of effects when the described emergency measures are taken, e.g. reduction of brake performance after isolation                              of brakes.                           

#### 4.3.**Functional and technical specification of the interfaces**U.K.

##### 4.3.1.*Interface with Energy subsystem*U.K.

###### *Table 6*

**Interface with the Energy subsystem**

##### 4.3.2.*Interface with Infrastructure subsystem*U.K.

###### *[F1Table 7*

**Interface with the Infrastructure subsystem**

##### 4.3.3.*Interface with Operation subsystem*U.K.

###### *Table 8*

**Interface with the Operation subsystem**

##### 4.3.4.*Interface with the Control, command and signalling subsystem*U.K.

###### *Table 9*

**Interface with the Control, command and signalling subsystem**

##### 4.3.5.*Interface with the Telematic application for passengers subsystem*U.K.

###### *Table 10*

**Interface with the Telematic application for passengers subsystem**

#### 4.4.**Operating rules**U.K.

In light of the essential requirements mentioned in Section 3, the provisions for operation of the rolling stock in the scope                              of this TSI are described in:                           
                -  Clause 4.3.3 ‘Interface with operation subsystem’, which refers to the relevant clauses of the Section 4.2 of this TSI. 
                -  Clause 4.2.12 ‘Documentation for Operation and Maintenance’ 

Operating rules are developed under the railway undertaking safety management system, with consideration of these provisions.

In particular, operating rules are necessary to ensure that a train stopped on a gradient as specified in clauses 4.2.4.2.1                              and 4.2.4.5.5 of this TSI (requirements related to braking) will be immobilised.                           

The operating rules for use of the public address system, the passenger alarm, the emergency exits, and the operation of the                              access doors are elaborated with consideration of the relevant provisions of this TSI and of the documentation for operation.                           

[F2For the safety critical components, the specific operational and operational traceability requirements are developed by the                                 designers/manufacturers at design phase and through a collaboration between designers/manufacturers and the concerned railway                                 undertakings after vehicles have entered into operation.]                            

The technical operating documentation described in clause 4.2.12.4 gives the rolling stock characteristics to be considered                              in order to define the operating rules in degraded mode.                           

Procedures for lifting and rescue are established (including the method and the means of recovering a derailed train or a                              train that is unable to move normally) with consideration of:                           
                -  the provisions for lifting and jacking described in clauses 4.2.2.6 and 4.2.12.5 of this TSI; 
                -  the provisions related to the braking system for rescue described in clauses 4.2.4.10 and 4.2.12.6 of this TSI. 

The safety rules for trackside workers or passengers on platforms are developed by the entity(ies) responsible for fixed installations                              with consideration of the relevant provisions of this TSI and of the technical documentation (e.g. impact of speed).                           

#### [F14.5.Maintenance rulesU.K.

##### (1)In light of the essential requirements mentioned in Section 3, the provisions for maintenance of the rolling stock in the                           scope of this TSI:U.K.

          -  Clause 4.2.11 ‘Servicing’                          
          -  Clause 4.2.12 ‘Documentation for Operation and Maintenance’.                          

##### (2)Other provisions in the section 4.2 (clauses 4.2.3.4 and 4.2.3.5) specify for particular characteristics the limit values                           that have to be verified during maintenance activities.U.K.

##### (2a)The safety critical components and their specific servicing, maintenance and maintenance traceability requirements are identified                           by the designers/manufacturers at design phase and through a collaboration between designers/manufacturers and the concerned                           entities in charge of maintenance after vehicles have entered into operation.U.K.

##### (3)From the information mentioned above and provided in the clause 4.2, the appropriate tolerances and intervals to ensure compliance                           with the essential requirements throughout the lifetime of the rolling stock are defined at maintenance operational level                           by and under the sole responsibility of entities in charge of maintenance (not in the scope of the assessment against this                           TSI); this activity includes:U.K.

          -  The definition of the in-service values where they are not specified in this TSI, or where operating conditions allow the                              use of different in-service limit values than those specified in this TSI.                          
          -  The justification of the in-service values, by providing the equivalent information to those required in clause 4.2.12.3.1                              ‘The maintenance design justification file’.                          

##### (4)On the basis of the information mentioned above in this clause, a maintenance plan is defined at maintenance operational level                           by and under the sole responsibility of the entities in charge of maintenance (not in the scope of the assessment against                           this TSI), consisting in a structured set of maintenance tasks that include the activities, tests and procedures, means, maintenance                           criteria, periodicity, working time required to carry out the maintenance tasks.U.K.

##### (5)For on-board software, the designer/manufacturer shall specify, for any on-board software modification, all maintenance requirements                           and procedures (including health monitoring, diagnosis of events, test methods and tools and also the required professional                           competence) necessary for achieving essential requirements and values quoted in the mandatory requirements of this TSI throughout                           the life-cycle (Installation, normal operation, failures, repair work, checking and maintenance, decommissioning, etc.).]U.K.

#### 4.6.**Professional competencies**U.K.

The professional competencies of staff required for the operation of the rolling stock in the scope of this TSI are not set                              out in this TSI.                           

They are partly covered by the TSI OPE and Directive 2007/59/EC of the European Parliament and of the Council(14).                           

#### 4.7.**Health and safety conditions**U.K.

The provisions for health and safety of staff required for the operation and maintenance of the rolling stock in the scope                              of this TSI are covered by the essential requirements Nos 1.1, 1.3, 2.5.1, 2.6.1 (as numbered in [F1Directive (EU) 2016/797]); the table in Section 3.2 mentions the technical clauses of this TSI in relation to these essential requirements.                           

In particular, the following provisions of Section 4.2 specify provisions for health and safety of staff:
                -  Clause 4.2.2.2.5: Staff access for coupling and uncoupling. 
                -  Clause 4.2.2.5: Passive safety. 
                -  Clause 4.2.2.8: Staff and freight access doors. 
                -  Clause 4.2.6.2.1: Slipstream effects on workers at trackside. 
                -  Clause 4.2.7.2.2: Warning horn sound pressure. 
                -  Clause 4.2.8.4: Protection against electrical hazards. 
                -  Clause 4.2.9: Driver's cab. 
                -  Clause 4.2.10: Fire safety and evacuation. 

#### 4.8.**European register of authorised types of vehicles**U.K.

The characteristics of the rolling stock that must be recorded in the ‘European register of authorised types of vehicles’                              are listed in Commission Implementing Decision 2011/665/EU of 4 October 2011 on the European register of authorised types                              of railway vehicles(15).                           

In accordance with Annex II of this decision on the European register and with [F1point (a) of Article 48(3) of Directive (EU) 2016/797], the values to be recorded for the parameters related to the technical characteristics of the rolling stock shall be those                              of the technical documentation accompanying the type examination certificate. Therefore, this TSI requires that the relevant                              characteristics are recorded in the technical documentation defined in the clause 4.2.12.                           

In accordance with Article 5 of the Decision referred to in the above point (1) of this clause 4.8, its application guide                              includes for each parameter a reference to the clauses of the technical specifications for interoperability that state the                              requirements for this parameter.                           

#### [F24.9.**Route compatibility checks before the use of authorised vehicles**U.K.

The parameters of the subsystem ‘rolling stock — locomotives and passenger rolling stock’ to be used by the railway undertaking, for the purpose of route compatibility check, are described in Appendix D1 of Commission                        Implementing Regulation (EU) 2019/773 (16) .]                   

### 5.INTEROPERABILITY CONSTITUENTSU.K.

#### 5.1.**Definition**U.K.

According to [F1Article 2(7) of Directive (EU) 2016/797], the interoperability constituents are ‘any elementary component, group of components, subassembly or complete assembly of                              equipment incorporated or intended to be incorporated into a subsystem upon which the interoperability of the rail system                              depends directly or indirectly.’                           

The concept of a ‘constituent’ covers both tangible objects and intangible objects such as software.

Interoperability constituents (IC) described in Section 5.3 below are constituents:
                -  Whose specification refers to a requirement defined in Section 4.2 of this TSI. The reference to the relevant clause of the                                    Section 4.2 is given in Section 5.3; it defines how the interoperability of the rail system depends on the particular constituent.                                   When a requirement is identified in Section 5.3 as being assessed at IC level, an assessment for the same requirement at sub-system                                    level is not required.                                  
                -  Whose specification may need additional requirements, such as interface requirements; these additional requirements are also                                    specified in Section 5.3.                                  
                -  And whose assessment procedure, independently of the related subsystem is described in Section 6.1. 

The area of use of an interoperability constituent shall be stated and demonstrated as described for each of them in Section                              5.3.                           

#### 5.2.**Innovative solution**U.K.

As stated in Article 10, innovative solutions may require new specification and/or new assessment methods. Such specifications                              and assessment methods shall be developed by the process described in clause 6.1.5 whenever an innovative solution is envisaged                              for an interoperability constituent.                           

#### 5.3.**Interoperability constituent specification**U.K.

The interoperability constituents are listed and specified below:

##### 5.3.1.*Automatic centre buffer coupler*U.K.

An automatic coupler shall be designed and assessed for an area of use defined by:

The type of end coupling (mechanical and pneumatic interface of the head);

The ‘type 10’ automatic coupler shall be compliant with the specification referenced in Appendix J-1, index 66.

*Note:* other types of automatic couplers than type 10 are not considered as an IC (specification not publicly available).U.K.                           

The tensile and compressive forces it is capable of withstanding;

These characteristics shall be assessed at IC level.

##### 5.3.2.*Manual end coupling*U.K.

A manual end coupling shall be designed and assessed for an area of use defined by:

The type of end coupling (mechanical interface).

The ‘UIC type’ shall be composed of buffer, draw gear and screw coupling system complying with the requirements of parts related                              to passenger coaches of the specification referenced in Appendix J-1, index 67 and the specification referenced in Appendix                              J-1, index 68; units other than coaches with manual coupling systems shall be fitted with a buffer, draw gear and screw coupling                              system complying with the relevant parts of the specification referenced in Appendix J-1, index 67 and the specification referenced                              in Appendix J-1, index 68 respectively.                           

*Note:* other types of manual end coupling are not considered as an IC (specification not publicly available).U.K.                           

The tensile and compressive forces it is capable of withstanding.

These characteristics shall be assessed at IC level.

##### 5.3.3.*Rescue couplers*U.K.

A rescue coupler shall be designed and assessed for an area of use defined by:

The type of end coupling it is capable of being interfaced with;

The rescue coupler to be interfaced with the ‘type 10’ automatic coupler shall be compliant with the specification referenced                              in Appendix J-1, index 69.                           

*Note:* other types of rescue coupler are not considered as an IC (specification not publicly available)U.K.                           

The tensile and compressive forces it is capable of withstanding.

The way it is intended to be installed on the rescuing unit.

These characteristics and the requirements expressed in clause 4.2.2.2.4 of this TSI shall be assessed at IC level.

##### 5.3.4.*Wheels*U.K.

A wheel shall be designed and assessed for an area of use defined by:

Geometrical characteristics: nominal tread diameter.

Mechanical characteristics: maximum vertical static force and maximum speed.

Thermo mechanical characteristics: maximum braking energy.

A wheel shall comply with the requirements on geometrical, mechanical and thermo mechanical characteristics defined in clause                              4.2.3.5.2.2; these requirements shall be assessed at IC level.                           

##### [F25.3.4a*Automatic variable gauge systems*U.K.

###### (1)An IC ‘automatic variable gauge system’ shall be designed and assessed for an area of use defined by:U.K.

          -  The track gauges the system is designed for.                          
          -  The range of maximum static axle loads (corresponding to design mass under normal payload as defined in clause 4.2.2.10 of                              this TSI).                          
          -  The range of nominal wheel tread diameters.                          
          -  The maximum design speed of the unit.                          
          -  The type(s) of track gauge changeover facility(ies) the system is designed for, including the nominal speed through the track                              gauge changeover facility(ies) and the maximum axial forces during the automatic gauge changeover process.                          

###### (2)An automatic variable gauge system shall comply with the requirements set out in clause 4.2.3.5.2.3; these requirements shall                           be assessed at IC level as set out in clause 6.1.3.1a.]U.K.

##### 5.3.5.*WSP (wheel slide protection system)*U.K.

A IC ‘WSP system’ shall be designed and assessed for an area of use defined by:

A brake system of pneumatic type.

*Note:* the WSP is not considered as an IC for other types of brake system such as hydraulic, dynamic and mixed braking systems,                              and this clause does not apply in that case.U.K.                           

The maximum operating speed.

A WSP system shall comply with the requirements related to the wheel slide protection system performance expressed in clause                              4.2.4.6.2 of this TSI.                           

The wheel rotation monitoring system may be included as an option.

##### 5.3.6.*Head lamps*U.K.

A head lamp is designed and assessed without any limitation concerning its area of use.

A head lamp shall comply with requirements concerning the colour and the luminous intensity defined in clause 4.2.7.1.1. These                              requirements shall be assessed at IC level.                           

##### 5.3.7.*Marker lamps*U.K.

A marker lamp is designed and assessed without any limitation concerning its area of use.

A marker lamp shall comply with requirements concerning the colour and the luminous intensity defined in clause 4.2.7.1.2.                              These requirements shall be assessed at IC level.                           

##### 5.3.8.*Tail lamps*U.K.

A tail lamp shall be designed and assessed for an area of use: fixed lamp or portable lamp.

A tail lamp shall comply with the requirements concerning the colour and the luminous intensity defined in clause 4.2.7.1.3.                              These requirements shall be assessed at IC level.                           

For portable tail lamps, the interface for attachment on the vehicle shall be in accordance with the Appendix E of the TSI                              ‘freight wagons’.                           

##### 5.3.9.*Horns*U.K.

A horn shall be designed and assessed for an area of use defined by its sound pressure level on a reference vehicle (or reference                              integration); this characteristic may be affected by the integration of the horn in a particular vehicle.                           

A horn shall comply with the requirements concerning the soundings of signals defined in clause 4.2.7.2.1. These requirements                              shall be assessed at IC level.                           

##### 5.3.10.*Pantograph*U.K.

A pantograph shall be designed and assessed for an area of use defined by:

The type of voltage system(s), as defined in clause 4.2.8.2.1.

In case it is designed for different voltage systems, the various sets of requirements shall be taken into account.

One of the 3 pantograph head geometries specified in clause 4.2.8.2.9.2.

The current capacity, as defined in clause 4.2.8.2.4.

The maximum current at standstill per contact wire of the overhead contact line for DC systems.

*Note:* the maximum current at standstill, as defined in clause 4.2.8.2.5., shall be compatible with the value above, considering                              the characteristics of the overhead contact line (1 or 2 contact wires).U.K.                           

The maximum operating speed: assessment of the maximum operating speed shall be performed as defined in clause 4.2.8.2.9.6.

Range of height for dynamic behaviour: standard, and/or for 1 520 mm or 1 524 mm track gauge systems.

The requirements listed above shall be assessed at IC level.

The working range in height of pantograph specified in clause 4.2.8.2.9.1.2, the pantograph head geometry specified in clause                              4.2.8.2.9.2, the pantograph current capacity specified in clause 4.2.8.2.9.3, the pantograph static contact force specified                              in clause 4.2.8.2.9.5 and the dynamic behaviour of the pantograph itself specified in clause 4.2.8.2.9.6 shall also be assessed                              at IC level.                           

##### 5.3.11.*Contact strips*U.K.

The contact strips are the replaceable parts of the pantograph head which are in contact with the contact wire.

Contact strips shall be designed and assessed for an area of use defined by:

Their geometry, as defined in clause 4.2.8.2.9.4.1.

The material of the contact strips, as defined in clause 4.2.8.2.9.4.2.

The type of voltage system(s), as defined in clause 4.2.8.2.1.

The current capacity, as defined in clause 4.2.8.2.4.

The maximum current at standstill for DC systems, as defined in clause 4.2.8.2.5.

The requirements listed above shall be assessed at IC level.

##### 5.3.12.*Main circuit breaker*U.K.

A main circuit breaker shall be designed and assessed for an area of use defined by:

The type of voltage system(s), as defined in clause 4.2.8.2.1.

The current capacity, as defined in clause 4.2.8.2.4 (maximum current).

The requirements listed above shall be assessed at IC level.

The tripping shall be as specified in the specification referenced in Appendix J-1, index 70 (see clause 4.2.8.2.10 of this                              TSI); it shall be assessed at the IC level.                           

##### 5.3.13.*Driver's seat*U.K.

A driver's seat shall be is designed and assessed for an area of use defined by the range of possible adjustments in height                              and longitudinal position.                           

A driver's seat shall comply to the requirements specified at component level in the clause 4.2.9.1.5. These requirements                              shall be assessed at IC level.                           

##### 5.3.14.*Toilet discharge connection*U.K.

A toilet discharge connection is designed and assessed without any limitation concerning its area of use.

A toilet discharge connection shall comply with requirements concerning the dimensions as defined in clause 4.2.11.3. These                              requirements shall be assessed at IC level.                           

##### 5.3.15.*Inlet connection for water tanks*U.K.

A inlet connection for water tanks is designed and assessed without any limitation concerning its area of use.

A inlet connection for water tanks shall comply with requirements concerning the dimensions as defined in clause 4.2.11.5.                              These requirements shall be assessed at IC level.                           

### 6.ASSESSMENT OF CONFORMITY OR SUITABILITY FOR USE AND ‘EC’ VERIFICATIONU.K.

Modules for the procedures for assessment of conformity, suitability for use and EC verification are described in the Commission                              Decision 2010/713/EU(17).                           

#### 6.1.**Interoperability constituents**U.K.

##### 6.1.1.*Conformity assessment*U.K.

An EC declaration of conformity or suitability for use, in accordance with [F1Article 10 of Directive (EU) 2016/797], shall be drawn up by the manufacturer or his authorised representative established in the Union before placing a interoperability                              constituent on the market.                           

The assessment of conformity or suitability for use of an interoperability constituent shall be performed according to the                              prescribed module(s) of that particular constituent specified in clause 6.1.2 of this TSI.                           

[F2In case of a specific case applicable to a component defined as interoperability constituent in section 5.3 of this TSI, the                                 corresponding requirement can be part of the verification at interoperability constituent level only in the case where the                                 component remains compliant to the chapters 4 and 5 of this TSI, and where the specific case does not refer to a national                                 rule (i.e. additional requirement compatible with the core TSI and fully specified in the TSI).                            

In other cases, the verification shall be made at subsystem level; when a national rule applies to a component, the concerned                                 Member State may define relevant applicable conformity assessment procedures.]                            

##### 6.1.2.*Application of modules*U.K.

**Modules for EC certification of conformity of interoperability constituents:**                   

The manufacturer or his authorised representative established within the European Union shall choose one of the modules or                              module combinations indicated in the following table for the constituent to be assessed:                           

Where a particular procedure shall be used for the assessment, in addition to the requirements expressed in the clause 4.2                              of this TSI, this is specified in the clause 6.1.3 below.                           

##### 6.1.3.*Particular assessment procedures for interoperability constituents*U.K.

###### 6.1.3.1.*Wheels (clause 5.3.4)*U.K.

The mechanical characteristics of the wheel shall be proven by mechanical strength calculations, taking into account three                              load cases: straight track (centred wheelset), curve (flange pressed against the rail), and negotiating of points and crossings                              (inside surface of flange applied to the rail), as specified in the specification referenced in Appendix J-1, index 71, clauses                              7.2.1 and 7.2.2.                           

For forged and rolled wheels, the decision criteria are defined in the specification referenced in Appendix J-1, index 71,                              clause 7.2.3; where the calculation show values beyond the decision criteria, a bench test according to the specification                              referenced in Appendix J-1, index 71, clause 7.3 is required to be performed to demonstrate compliance.                           

Other types of wheels are permitted for vehicles restricted to national use. In that case the decision criteria and the fatigue                              stress criteria shall be specified in national rules. Those national rules shall be notified by Member States.                           

The assumption of the load conditions for the maximum vertical static force shall be explicitly stated in the technical documentation                              as set out in clause 4.2.12 of this TSI.                           

**Thermo-mechanical behaviour:**                   

If the wheel is used to brake a unit with blocks acting on the wheel running surface, the wheel shall be thermo mechanically                              proven by taking into account the maximum braking energy foreseen. The wheel shall be subject to a conformity assessment in                              accordance with the specification referenced in Appendix J-1, index 71, clause 6 in order to check that the lateral displacement                              of the rim during braking and the residual stress are within tolerance limits specified utilising the decision criteria specified.                           

**Verification of the wheels:**                   

A verification procedure shall exist to ensure at the production phase that no defects may detrimentally affect safety due                              to any change in the mechanical characteristics of the wheels.                           

The tensile strength of the material in the wheel, the hardness of the running surface, the fracture toughness, the resistance                              to impact, the material characteristics and the material cleanliness shall be verified.                           

The verification procedure shall specify the batch sampling used for each characteristic to be verified.

Other conformity assessment method for wheels is allowed under the same conditions as for wheelsets; these conditions are                              described in clause 6.2.3.7.                           

In case of innovative design for which the manufacturer has no sufficient return of experience, the wheel should be subject                              to an assessment of suitability for use (module CV; see also clause 6.1.6).                           

###### [F26.1.3.1a.*Automatic variable gauge system (clause 5.3.4a)*U.K.

###### (1)The assessment procedure shall be based on a validation plan covering all aspects mentioned in clauses 4.2.3.5.3 and 5.3.4a.U.K.

###### (2)The validation plan shall be consistent with the safety analysis required in clause 4.2.3.5.3 and shall define the assessment                           needed in all the following different phases:U.K.

          -  Design review.                          
          -  Static tests (bench tests and integration in the running gear/unit tests).                          
          -  Test on track gauge changeover facility(ies), representative of in-service conditions.                          
          -  On-track tests, representative of in-service conditions.                          

###### (3)Regarding the demonstration of compliance to points (5) of clause 4.2.3.5.3, the assumptions considered for the safety analysis                           related to the vehicle the system is intended to be integrated in, and related to the mission profile of that vehicle, shall                           be clearly documented.U.K.

###### (4)The automatic variable gauge system may be subject to an assessment of suitability for use (module CV; see also clause 6.1.6).U.K.

###### (5)The certificate delivered by the Notified Body in charge of the conformity assessment shall include both the conditions for                           use as per clause 5.3.4a (1) and the type(s) and operating conditions of the track gauge changeover facility(ies) the automatic                           variable gauge system has been assessed for.]U.K.

###### 6.1.3.2.*Wheel slide protection system (clause 5.3.5)*U.K.

The wheel slide protection system shall be verified according to the methodology defined in the specification referenced in                              Appendix J-1, index 72; when reference is made to the clause 6.2 of the same specification ‘overview of required test programmes’,                              only the clause 6.2.3 applies, and it applies to all WSP systems.                           

In case of innovative design for which the manufacturer has no sufficient return of experience, the wheel slide protection                              system should be subject to an assessment of suitability for use (module CV; see also clause 6.1.6).                           

###### 6.1.3.3.*Headlamps (clause 5.3.6)*U.K.

The colour of headlamps shall be tested in accordance with the specification referenced in Appendix J-1, index 73, clause                              6.3.                           

The luminous intensity of headlamps shall be tested in accordance with the specification referenced in Appendix J-1, index                              73, clause 6.4.                           

###### 6.1.3.4.*Marker lamps (clause 5.3.7)*U.K.

The colour of marker lamps and the spectral radiation distribution of light from marker lamps shall be tested in accordance                              with the specification referenced in Appendix J-1, index 74, clause 6.3.                           

The luminous intensity of marker lamps shall be tested in accordance with the specification referenced in Appendix J-1, index                              74, clause 6.4.                           

###### 6.1.3.5.*Tail lamps (clause 5.3.8)*U.K.

The colour of tail lamps shall be tested in accordance with the specification referenced in Appendix J-1, index 75, clause                              6.3.                           

The luminous intensity of tail lamps shall be tested in accordance with the specification referenced in Appendix J-1, index                              75, clause 6.4.                           

###### 6.1.3.6.*Horn (clause 5.3.9)*U.K.

Soundings of the warning horn shall be measured and verified in accordance with the specification referenced in Appendix J-1,                              index 76, clause 6.                           

Sound pressure levels of the warning horn on a reference vehicle shall be measured and verified in accordance with the specification                              referenced in Appendix J-1, index 76, clause 6.                           

###### 6.1.3.7.*Pantograph (clause 5.3.10)*U.K.

For pantographs for DC systems, the maximum current at standstill per contact wire shall be verified in the following conditions:
                -  the pantograph shall be in contact with 1 copper contact wire. 
                -  the pantograph shall apply a static contact force as defined in the specification referenced in Appendix J-1, index 77. 
                -  and the temperature of the contact point monitored continuously during a test of 30 minutes shall not exceed the values given                                    in the specification referenced in Appendix J-1, index 78.                                  

For all pantographs, the static contact force shall be verified in accordance with the specification referenced in Appendix                              J-1, index 79.                           

The dynamic behaviour of the pantograph regarding current collection shall be assessed by simulation according to the specification                              referenced in Appendix J-1, index 80.                           

The simulations shall be made using at least two different types of overhead contact line; data for simulation shall correspond                              to sections of lines recorded as TSI compliant in the register of infrastructure (EC declaration of conformity, or declaration                              according to Commission Recommendation 2011/622/EU(18)) for the appropriate speed and supply system, up to the design speed of the proposed Interoperability Constituent pantograph.                           

It is permitted to perform the simulation using types of overhead contact line that are under the process of IC certification                              or declaration according to Recommendation 2011/622/EU, provided that they fulfil the other requirements of ENE TSI. The simulated                              current collection quality shall be in accordance with clause 4.2.8.2.9.6 for uplift, mean contact force and standard deviation                              for each of the overhead contact lines.                           

If the simulation results are acceptable, a site dynamic test shall be made using a representative section of one of the two                              types of overhead contact line used in the simulation.                           

The interaction characteristics shall be measured in accordance with the specification referenced in Appendix J-1, index 81.

The tested pantograph shall be mounted on a rolling stock producing a mean contact force within the upper and lower limits                              as required by clause 4.2.8.2.9.6 up to the design speed of the pantograph. The tests shall be conducted in both directions                              of travel.                           

For pantographs intended to be operated on the 1 435 mm and 1 668 mm track gauge systems, the tests shall include track sections                              with low contact wire height (defined as between 5,0 to 5,3 m) and track sections with high contact wire height (defined as                              between 5,5 to 5,75 m).                           

For pantographs intended to be operated on the 1 520 mm and 1 524 mm track gauge systems, the tests shall include track sections                              with contact wire height between 6,0 to 6,3 m.                           

The tests shall be performed for a minimum of 3 speed increments up to and including the design speed of the tested pantograph.

The interval between successive tests shall be no greater than 50 km/h.

The measured current collection quality shall be in accordance with clause 4.2.8.2.9.6 for uplift, and either mean contact                              force and standard deviation or percentage of arcing.                           

If all the assessments above are passed successfully, the tested pantograph design shall be considered as compliant to the                              TSI regarding quality of current collection.                           

For the use of a pantograph holding an EC declaration of verification on various designs of rolling stock, additional tests                              required at rolling stock level regarding quality of current collection are specified in clause 6.2.3.20.                           

###### 6.1.3.8.*Contact strips (clause 5.3.11)*U.K.

Contact strips shall be verified as specified in the specification referenced in Appendix J-1, index 82.

Contact strips, being replaceable parts of the pantograph head, shall be verified once at the same time as a pantograph (see                              clause 6.1.3.7) regarding the quality of current collection.                           

In case of use of a material for which the manufacturer as no sufficient return of experience, the contact strip should be                              subject to an assessment of suitability for use (module CV; see also clause 6.1.6).                           

##### 6.1.4.*Project phases where assessment is required*U.K.

It is detailed in Appendix H of this TSI in which phases of the project an assessment shall be done for the requirements applicable                              to the interoperability constituents:                           
                -  Design and development phase:                    -  Design review and/or design examination. 
                  -  Type test: test to verify the design, if and as defined in the Section 4.2. 
                -  Production phase: routine test to verify the conformity of production.  The entity in charge of the assessment of the routine tests is determined according to the assessment module chosen. 

Annex H is structured according to Section 4.2; the requirements and their assessment applicable to the interoperability constituents                              are identified in Section 5.3 by reference to certain clauses of Section 4.2; where relevant, a reference to a sub-clause                              of clause 6.1.3 above is also given.                           

##### 6.1.5.*Innovative solutions*U.K.

If an innovative solution (as defined in article 10) is proposed for an interoperability constituent, the manufacturer or                              his authorised representative established within the European Union shall apply the procedure described in article 10.                           

##### 6.1.6.*Assessment of suitability for use*U.K.

[F1Assessment of suitability for use according to the type validation of in service experience procedure (module CV) may be part                                 of the assessment procedure for the following interoperability constituents:                            
                -  Wheels (see clause 6.1.3.1).                                   
                -  Automatic variable gauge system (see clause 6.1.3.1a).                                   
                -  Wheel slide protection system (see clause 6.1.3.2).                                   
                -  Contact strips (see clause 6.1.3.8).]                                   

Prior to commencing in service tests, a suitable module (CB or CH1) shall be used to certify the design of the constituent.

The in service tests shall be organised on proposal from the manufacturer, who has to obtain an agreement with a railway undertaking                              for its contribution to such assessment.                           

#### 6.2.**Rolling stock subsystem**U.K.

##### 6.2.1.*EC verification (general)*U.K.

The EC verification procedures to be applied to the rolling stock subsystem are described in [F1Article 15 and Annex IV of Directive (EU) 2016/797].                           

The EC verification procedure of a rolling stock unit shall be performed according to the prescribed modules(s) specified                              in clause 6.2.2 of this TSI.                           

When a first step assessment covering the design stage or the design and production stages is applied for by the applicant,                              the notified body of his choice shall issue the Intermediate Statement Verification (ISV) and the EC declaration of Intermediate                              Sub-system conformity shall been drawn up.                           

##### 6.2.2.*Application of modules*U.K.

**Modules for the EC verification of subsystems:**                   

The applicant shall choose one of the following combinations of modules:

(SB + SD) or (SB + SF) or (SH1) for each concerned subsystem (or part of subsystem).

The assessment shall then be performed according to the combination of modules chosen.

Where several EC verifications (e.g. against several TSIs addressing the same sub-system) require verification based on the                              same production assessment (module SD or SF), it is allowed to combine several SB module assessments with one production module                              assessment (SD or SF). In this case, ISVs shall be issued for the design and development phases according to module SB.                           

The validity of the type or design examination certificate shall be indicated in accordance with the provisions for phase                              B of clause 7.1.3 ‘Rules related to EC verification’, of this TSI.                           

Where a particular procedure shall be used for the assessment, in addition to the requirements expressed in the clause 4.2                              of this TSI, this is specified in the clause 6.2.3 below.                           

##### 6.2.3.*Particular assessment procedures for subsystems*U.K.

###### 6.2.3.1.*Load conditions and weighed mass (clause 4.2.2.10)*U.K.

Weighed mass shall be measured, for a load condition corresponding to ‘design mass in working order’ with the exception of                              consumables for which there is no imposition (for example ‘dead mass’ is acceptable).                           

It is permissible to derive the other load conditions by calculation.

Where a vehicle is declared as conformant to a type (in accordance with clauses 6.2.2 and 7.1.3 of this TSI):
                -  the weighed total vehicle mass in the load condition ‘design mass in working order’ shall not exceed by more than 3 % the                                    declared total vehicle mass for that type which is reported in the type or design examination certificate of ‘EC’ verification                                    and in the technical documentation described in clause 4.2.12.                                  
                -  additionally, for unit of maximum design speed higher than or equal to 250 km/h the mass per axle for the load condition ‘design                                    mass under normal payload’ shall not exceed by more than 4 % the declared mass per axle for the same load condition.                                  

###### 6.2.3.2.*Wheel load (clause 4.2.3.2.2)*U.K.

The wheel load shall be measured considering the load condition ‘design mass in working order’ (with same exception as in                              clause 6.2.3.1 above).                           

###### 6.2.3.3.*Safety against derailment running on twisted track (Clause 4.2.3.4.1)*U.K.

[F1The demonstration of conformity shall be carried out in accordance with one of the methods specified in the specification                                 referenced in Appendix J-1, index 83.]                            

For units intended to be operated on 1 520 mm system, alternative methods for conformity assessment are allowed.

###### [F16.2.3.4.*Running dynamic behaviour – technical requirements (Clause 4.2.3.4.2 a)*U.K.

###### (1)For units designed to be operated on 1 435 mm or 1 524 mm or 1 668 mm system, the demonstration of conformity shall be carried out in accordance with the specification referenced in Appendix                           J-1, index 84, clause 7.U.K.

The parameters described in clauses 4.2.3.4.2.1 and 4.2.3.4.2.2 shall be assessed using criteria defined in the specification                        referenced in Appendix J-1, index 84.]                   

###### 6.2.3.5.*Conformity assessment for safety requirements*U.K.

The demonstration of compliance with the safety requirements expressed in the clause 4.2 shall be performed as follows:

The scope of this assessment shall be strictly limited to the rolling stock design, considering that operation, test and maintenance                              are performed according to the rules defined by the applicant (as described in the technical file).                           

###### *Notes:*U.K.

                -  When defining the test and maintenance requirements, the safety level to be met has to be taken into account by the applicant                                    (consistency); the demonstration of compliance covers also test and maintenance requirements.                                  
                -  Other sub-systems and human factors (errors) shall not be considered. 

All assumptions considered for the mission profile shall be clearly documented in the demonstration.

[F1The compliance with the safety requirements that are specified in clauses 4.2.3.4.2, 4.2.3.5.3, 4.2.4.2.2, 4.2.5.3.5, 4.2.5.5.8                                 and 4.2.5.5.9 in terms of level of severity/consequences associated to hazardous failure scenarios shall be demonstrated by                                 one of the two following methods:                            

Application of a harmonised risk acceptance criterion associated to the severity specified in the clause 4.2 (e.g. ‘fatalities’ for emergency braking.).                                     

The applicant may choose to use this method, provided that there is an available harmonized risk acceptance criterion defined                                          in the CSM on Risk Assessment and its amendments (Commission Implementing Regulation (EU) No 402/2013 (19) ).                                     

The applicant shall demonstrate compliance with the harmonised criterion by applying Annex I-3 of the CSM on RA. The following                                          principles (and their combinations) may be used for the demonstration: similarity with reference system(s); application of                                          codes of practice; application of explicit risk estimation (e.g. probabilistic approach).                                     

The applicant shall designate the body for the assessment of the demonstration he will provide: the notified body selected                                          for the RST sub-system or an assessment body as defined in the CSM on RA.                                     

The demonstration shall be recognized in all Member States; or                                     

Application of a risk evaluation and assessment in accordance with the CSM on RA, in order to define the risk acceptance criterion                                          to be used, and demonstrate compliance to this criterion.                                     

The applicant may choose to use this method in any case.                                     

The applicant shall designate the assessment body for the assessment of the demonstration he will provide, as defined in the                                          CSM on RA.                                     

A safety assessment report shall be provided in compliance with the requirements defined in the CSM on RA and its amendments.                                     

The safety assessment report shall be taken into account by the Authorising Entity, in accordance with Section 2.5.6 of Annex                                          I and Article 15(2) of the CSM on RA.]                                     

For each TSI clause listed in point (3) above, the relevant documents accompanying the EC declaration of verification (e.g.                              EC certificate issued by the notified body or safety assessment report) shall explicitly mention the ‘used method’ (‘1’ or                              ‘2’); in case of method ‘2’, they shall also mention the ‘used risk acceptance criterion’.                           

###### 6.2.3.6.*Design values for new wheel profiles (Clause 4.2.3.4.3.1)*U.K.

For units designed to be operated on 1 435 mm track gauge system, the wheel profile and the distance between active faces                              of the wheels (Dimension SR in Figure 1, § 4.2.3.5.2.1) shall be selected to ensure that the equivalent conicity limit set                              out in Table 11 below is not exceeded when the designed wheelset is combined with each of the sample of track parameters as                              specified in Table 12 below.                           

[F1The evaluation of the equivalent conicity is set out in the specification referenced in Appendix J-1, index 107.]                            

###### *Table 11*

**Equivalent conicity design limit values**

###### *Table 12.*

**Track test conditions for equivalent conicity representative of the network. All rail sections defined in the specification                                    referenced in Appendix J-1, index 85.**

The requirements of this clause are deemed to have been met by wheelsets having unworn S1002 or GV 1/40 profiles, as defined                              in the specification referenced in Appendix J-1, index 86 with spacing of active faces between 1 420 mm and 1 426 mm.                           

For units designed to be operated on 1 524 mm track gauge system, the wheel profile and the distance between active faces                              of the wheels shall be selected with the following inputs:                           

###### *Table 13*

**Equivalent conicity design limit values**

###### *Table 14*

**Track test conditions for equivalent conicity. All rail sections defined in the specification referenced in Appendix J-1,                                    index 85**

The requirements of this clause are deemed to have been met by wheelsets having unworn S1002 or GV 1/40 profiles, as defined                              in the specification referenced in Appendix J-1, index 86, with spacing of active faces distance 1 510.                           

For units designed to be operated on 1 668 mm track gauge system, equivalent conicity limits set in the Table 15 shall not                              be exceeded when the designed wheelset is modelled passing over the representative sample of track test conditions as specified                              in Table 16:                           

###### *Table 15*

**Equivalent conicity design limit values**

###### *Table 16*

**Track test conditions for equivalent conicity. All rail sections defined in the specification referenced in Appendix J-1,                                    index 85**

The requirements of this clause are deemed to have been met by wheelsets having unworn S1002 or GV 1/40 profiles, as defined                              in the specification referenced in Appendix J-1, index 86 with spacing of active faces between 1 653 mm and 1 659 mm.                           

###### 6.2.3.7.*Mechanical and geometric characteristics of wheelsets (clause 4.2.3.5.2.1)*U.K.

**Wheelset:**                   

The demonstration of compliance for the assembly shall be based on the specification referenced in Appendix J-1, index 87,                              which defines limit values for the axial force, and the associated verification tests.                           

**Axles:**                   

The demonstration of compliance for mechanical resistance and fatigue characteristics of the axle shall be in accordance with                              the specification referenced in Appendix J-1, index 88, clauses 4, 5 and 6 for non-powered axles, or the specification referenced                              in Appendix J-1, index 89, clauses 4, 5 and 6 for powered axles.                           

The decision criteria for the permissible stress is specified in the specification referenced in Appendix J-1, index 88, clause                              7 for non-powered axles, or the specification referenced in Appendix J-1, index 89, clause 7 for powered axles.                           

The assumption of the load conditions for the calculations shall be explicitly stated in the technical documentation as set                              out in clause 4.2.12 of this TSI.                           

**Verification of the axles:**                   

A verification procedure shall exist to ensure at the production phase that no defects may detrimentally affect safety due                              to any change in the mechanical characteristics of the axles.                           

The tensile strength of the material in the axle, the resistance to impact, the surface integrity, the material characteristics                              and the material cleanliness shall be verified.                           

The verification procedure shall specify the batch sampling used for each characteristic to be verified.

**Axle boxes/bearings:**                   

The demonstration of compliance for mechanical resistance and fatigue characteristics of the rolling bearing shall be in accordance                              with the specification referenced in Appendix J-1, index 90.                           

Other conformity assessment method applicable to wheelsets, axles and wheels where the EN standards do not cover the proposed                              technical solution:                           

It is permitted to use other standards where the EN standards do not cover the proposed technical solution; in that case the                              notified body shall verify that the alternative standards form part of a technically consistent set of standards applicable                              to the design, construction and testing of the wheelsets, containing specific requirements for wheelset, wheels, axles and                              axle bearings covering:                           
                -  wheelset assembly, 
                -  mechanical resistance, 
                -  fatigue characteristics, 
                -  permissible stress limits, 
                -  thermomechanical characteristics. 

Only standards that are publicly available can be referred to in the demonstration required above.

Particular case of wheelsets, axles and axle boxes/bearings manufactured according to an existing design:

In the case of products manufactured according to a design developed and already used to place products on the market before                              the entry into force of relevant TSIs applicable to those products, the applicant is allowed to deviate from the conformity                              assessment procedure above, and to demonstrate conformity with the requirements of this TSI by referring to design review                              and type examination performed for previous applications under comparable conditions; this demonstration shall be documented,                              and is considered as providing the same level of proof as module SB or design examination according to module SH1.                           

###### [F26.2.3.7a.*Automatic variable gauge system*U.K.

###### (1)The safety analysis required in clause 4.2.3.5.3 point (5), and performed at IC level, shall be consolidated at the level                           of the unit (vehicle); in particular, the assumptions made according to clause 6.1.3.1a point (3) may need to be reviewed                           to take into account the vehicle and its mission profile.U.K.

###### (2)The assessment of the integration of the IC within the running gear/unit and the technical compatibility with the track gauge                           changeover facility shall consist of:U.K.

          -  The compliance with the area of use defined in clause 5.3.4.a (1) shall be verified,                          
          -  Verification of the correct integration of the IC within the running gear/unit, including the correct performance of its on-board                              control/monitoring system (when applicable), and                          
          -  On-track tests including tests on the track gauge changeover facility(ies), representative of in-service conditions.]                          

###### 6.2.3.8.*Emergency braking (clause 4.2.4.5.2)*U.K.

The braking performance which is subject to a test is the stopping distance as defined in the specification referenced in                              Appendix J-1, index 91. The deceleration is evaluated from the stopping distance.                           

Tests shall be carried out on dry rails at the following initial speeds (if lower than the maximum design speed): 30 km/h;                              100 km/h;120 km/h; 140 km/h; 160 km/h; 200 km/h; in steps not greater than 40 km/h from 200 km/h to maximum design speed of                              the unit.                           

Tests shall be carried out for the load conditions of the unit ‘design mass in working order’‘design mass under normal payload’                              and ‘maximum braking load’ (as defined in clauses 4.2.2.10 and 4.2.4.5.2).                           

Where 2 of the load conditions above lead to similar brake test conditions according to relevant EN standards or normative                              documents, it is allowed to reduce the number of tests conditions from 3 to 2.                           

Test results shall be evaluated by a methodology that takes into account the following aspects:
                -  correction of the raw data, 
                -  repeatability of the test: in order to validate a test result, the test is repeated several times; the absolute difference                                    between results and the standard deviation are evaluated.                                  

###### 6.2.3.9.*Service braking (clause 4.2.4.5.3)*U.K.

The maximum service braking performance which is subject to a test is the stopping distance as defined in the specification                              referenced in Appendix J-1, index 92. The deceleration is evaluated from the stopping distance.                           

Tests shall be carried out on dry rail at the initial speed equal to the maximum design speed of the unit, the load condition                              of the unit being one of those defined in the clause 4.2.4.5.2.                           

Test results shall be evaluated by a methodology that takes into account the following aspects:
                -  correction of the raw data, 
                -  repeatability of the test: in order to validate a test result, the test is repeated several times; the absolute difference                                    between results and the standard deviation are evaluated.                                  

###### 6.2.3.10.*Wheel slide protection system (clause 4.2.4.6.2)*U.K.

If a unit is equipped with a WSP, a test of the unit in low adhesion conditions shall be carried out according to the specification                              referenced in Appendix J-1, index 93, in order to validate the performance of the WSP system (maximum extension of the stopping                              distance compared to stopping distance on dry rail) when integrated in the unit.                           

###### 6.2.3.11.*Sanitary systems (clause 4.2.5.1)*U.K.

In case the sanitary system allows the release of fluids to the environment (e.g. on the tracks), the assessment of conformity                              may be based on previous in-service testing when the following conditions are met:                           
                -  The results of the in service tests were obtained on types of equipment which have an identical treatment method. 
                -  The conditions of test are similar as the ones that may be assumed for the unit under assessment, with regard to loading volumes,                                    environmental conditions, and all other parameters which will influence the efficiency and effectiveness of the treatment                                    process.                                  

If suitable in-service testing results are lacking, type tests shall be performed.

###### 6.2.3.12.*Internal air quality (clause 4.2.5.8 and clause 4.2.9.1.7)*U.K.

Conformity assessment of the CO2-levels is permitted to be established by calculation of fresh air ventilation volumes assuming an outside air quality containing                              400 ppm CO2 and an emission of 32 grams of CO2 per passenger per hour. The number of passengers to be taken into account shall be derived from the occupation under the                              load condition ‘design mass under normal payload’, as stipulated in clause 4.2.2.10 of this TSI.                           

###### [F16.2.3.13.*Slipstream effects on passengers on platform and on workers trackside (clause 4.2.6.2.1)*U.K.

###### (1)Demonstration of conformity with the limit value of trackside maximum permissible air speed set out in clause 4.2.6.2.1 of                           this TSI shall be demonstrated on the basis of full-scale tests on straight track performed in accordance with clause 6.2.2.1                           of specification referenced in Appendix J-1, index 94.U.K.

###### (2)Instead of the full assessment described above, it is permitted to carry out a simplified assessment for rolling stock of                           a similar design to rolling stock for which the full assessment defined in this TSI has been carried out. In such cases, the                           simplified conformity assessment defined in clause 4.2.4 of the specification referenced in Appendix J-1, index 94, can be                           applied as long as the differences in the design remain within the limits of table 7 of the specification referenced in Appendix                           J-1, index 94.]U.K.

###### [F16.2.3.14.*Head pressure pulse (clause 4.2.6.2.2)*U.K.

###### (1)Conformity shall be assessed on the basis of full-scale tests under conditions specified in the specification referenced in                           Appendix J-1, index 95, clause 6.1.2.1. Alternatively conformity may be assessed by means of either validated Computational                           Fluid Dynamics (CFD) simulations as described in the specification referenced in Appendix J-1, index 95, clause 6.1.2.4 or                           as an additional alternative conformity is permitted to be assessed by moving model tests as specified in the specification                           referenced in Appendix J-1, index 95, clause 6.1.2.2.U.K.

###### (2)Instead of the full assessment described above, it is permitted to carry out a simplified assessment for rolling stock of                           a similar design to rolling stock for which the full assessment defined in this TSI has been carried out. In such cases, the                           simplified conformity assessment defined in clause 4.1.4 of the specification referenced in Appendix J-1, index 95, can be                           applied as long as the differences in the design remain within the limits of table 4 of the specification referenced in Appendix                           J-1, index 95.]U.K.

###### 6.2.3.15.*Maximum pressure variations in tunnels (clause 4.2.6.2.3)*U.K.

Conformity shall be proven on the basis of full-scale tests, carried out at reference speed or at a higher speed in a tunnel                              with a cross sectional area as close to the reference case as possible. Transfer to the reference condition shall be done                              with validated simulation software.                           

When assessing conformity of whole trains or trainsets, assessment shall be made with the maximum length of the train or coupled                              trainsets up to 400 m.                           

When assessing conformity of locomotives or driving coaches, assessment shall be done on a basis of two arbitrary train compositions                              of minimum length 150 m, one with a leading locomotive or driving coach (to check the ΔpN) and one with a locomotive or a                              driving coach at the end (to check ΔpT). ΔpFr is set to 1 250 Pa (for trains with vtr,max < 250 km/h) or to 1 400 Pa (for                              trains with vtr,max ≥ 250 km/h).                           

When assessing conformity of coaches only, assessment shall be done on the basis of one 400 m long train.

ΔpN is set to 1 750 Pa and ΔpT to 700 Pa (for trains with vtr,max < 250 km/h) or to 1 600 Pa and 1 100 Pa (for trains with                              vtr,max ≥ 250 km/h).                           

For the distance xp between the entrance portal and the measuring position, the definitions of ΔpFr, ΔpN, ΔpT, the minimum                              tunnel length and further information about the derivation of the characteristic pressure variation, see the specification                              referenced in Appendix J-1, index 96.                           

The pressure change due to altitude changes between the entry and the exit point in the tunnel shall not be taken into account                              in the assessment.                           

###### 6.2.3.16.*Cross wind (clause 4.2.6.2.4)*U.K.

Conformity assessment is fully specified in clause 4.2.6.2.4

###### 6.2.3.17.*Warning Horn sound pressure levels (clause 4.2.7.2.2)*U.K.

Sound pressure levels of the warning horn shall be measured and verified in accordance with the specification referenced in                              Appendix J-1, index 97.                           

###### 6.2.3.18.*Maximum power and current from the overhead contact line (clause 4.2.8.2.4)*U.K.

Conformity assessment shall be carried out in accordance with the specification referenced in Appendix J-1, index 98.

###### 6.2.3.19.*Power factor (clause 4.2.8.2.6)*U.K.

Conformity assessment shall be carried out according to the specification referenced in Appendix J-1, index 99.

###### [F56.2.3.19a.*On-board energy measurement system (clause 4.2.8.2.8)*U.K.

###### (1)Energy measurement function (EMF)U.K.

The accuracy of the each device containing one or more functions of EMF shall be assessed by testing each function, under                        reference conditions, using the relevant method as described in clauses 5.4.3.4.1, 5.4.3.4.2 and 5.4.4.3.1 of the specification                        referenced in Appendix J-1, index 117. The input quantity and power factor range when testing shall correspond to the values                        set out in Table 3 of the specification referenced in Appendix J-1, index 117.                   

The effects of temperature on accuracy of the each device containing one or more functions of EMF shall be assessed by testing                        each function, under reference conditions (except for temperature), using the relevant method as described in clauses 5.4.3.4.3.1,                        and 5.4.4.3.2.1 of the specification referenced in Appendix J-1, index 117.                   

The mean temperature coefficient of each device containing one or more functions of EMF shall be assessed by testing each                        function, under reference conditions (except for temperature), using the relevant method as described in clauses 5.4.3.4.3.2                        and 5.4.4.3.2.2 of the specification referenced in Appendix J-1, index 120.                   

###### (2)Data handling system (DHS)U.K.

The compiling and handling of data within the DHS shall be assessed by testing using the method as described in the specification                        referenced in Appendix J-1, index 121.                   

###### (3)On-board energy measurement system (EMS)U.K.

The EMS shall be assessed by testing as described in the specification referenced in the specification referenced in Appendix                        J-1, index 122.]                   

Textual Amendments

F5Inserted by Commission Implementing Regulation (EU) 2018/868 of 13 June 2018 amending Regulation (EU) No 1301/2014 and Regulation (EU)                                 No 1302/2014 as regards provisions on energy measuring system and data collecting system (Text with EEA relevance).

###### 6.2.3.20.*Current collection dynamic behaviour (clause 4.2.8.2.9.6)*U.K.

When a pantograph, holding an EC declaration of conformity or suitability for use as IC, is integrated in a rolling stock                              unit which is assessed according to the LOC&PAS TSI, dynamic tests shall be carried out in order to measure the mean contact                              force and standard deviation or the percentage of arcing, in accordance with the specification referenced in Appendix J-1,                              index 100 up to the design speed for the unit.                           

For a unit designed to be operated on the 1 435 mm and 1 668 mm track gauge systems, the tests, for each installed pantograph,                              shall be conducted in both directions of travel and shall include track sections with low contact wire height (defined as                              between 5,0 to 5,3 m) and track sections with high contact wire height (defined as between 5,5 to 5,75 m).                           

For units designed to be operated on the 1 520 mm and 1 524 mm track gauge systems, the tests shall include track sections                              with contact wire height between 6,0 to 6,3 m.                           

The tests shall be performed for a minimum of 3 speed increments up to and including the design speed of the unit. The interval                              between successive tests shall be no greater than 50 km/h.                           

During the test, the static contact force shall be adjusted for each particular power supply system within the range, as specified                              in clause 4.2.8.2.9.5).                           

The measured results shall be in accordance with the clause 4.2.8.2.9.6 for either mean contact force and standard deviation                              or percentage of arcing.                           

###### 6.2.3.21.*Arrangement of pantographs (clause 4.2.8.2.9.7)*U.K.

The characteristics related to the dynamic behaviour of the current collection shall be verified as specified in clause 6.2.3.20                              above.                           

###### 6.2.3.22.*Windscreen (clause 4.2.9.2)*U.K.

The characteristics of the windscreen shall be verified as specified in the specification referenced in Appendix J-1, index                              101.                           

###### 6.2.3.23.*Fire detection systems (clause 4.2.10.3.2)*U.K.

The requirement 4.2.10.3.2 (1) shall be deemed to be satisfied by the verification that the rolling stock is equipped with                              a fire detection system in the following areas:                           
                -  technical compartment or cabinet, sealed or not sealed, containing electrical supply line and/or traction circuit equipment, 
                -  technical area with a combustion engine, 
                -  in sleeping cars and sleeping compartments, including their staff compartments and their adjacent gangways and their adjacent                                    combustion heating equipment.                                  

##### 6.2.4.*Project phases where assessment is required*U.K.

It is detailed in Appendix H of this TSI in which phase of the project an assessment shall be done:
                -  Design and development phase:                    -  Design review and/or design examination 
                  -  Type test: test to verify the design, if and as defined in the Section 4.2. 
                -  Production phase: routine test to verify the conformity of production.  The entity in charge of the assessment of the routine tests is determined according to the assessment module chosen. 

The Appendix H is structured according to the Section 4.2, which defines the requirements and their assessment applicable                              to the rolling stock sub-system; where relevant, a reference to a sub-clause of the clause 6.2.2.2 above is also given.                           

In particular, where a type test is identified in the Appendix H, the Section 4.2 shall be considered for the conditions and                              requirements related to this test.                           

Where several EC verifications (e.g. against several TSIs addressing the same sub-system) require verification based on the                              same production assessment (module SD or SF), it is allowed to combine several SB module assessments with one production module                              assessment (SD or SF). In this case, ISVs shall be issued for the design and development phases according to module SB.                           

If module SB is used, the validity of the EC declaration of intermediate subsystem conformity shall be indicated in accordance                              with the provisions for phase B of clause 7.1.3 ‘Rules related to the EC verification’, of this TSI.                           

##### 6.2.5.*Innovative solutions*U.K.

If an innovative solution (as defined article 10), is proposed for the rolling stock subsystem, the applicant shall apply                              the procedure described in article 10.                           

##### 6.2.6.*Assessment of documentation requested for operation and maintenance*U.K.

According to [F1Article 15(4) of Directive (EU) 2016/797], a Notified Body shall be responsible for compiling the technical file, containing the documentation requested for operation                              and maintenance.                           

The Notified Body shall verify only that the documentation requested for operation and maintenance, as defined in clause 4.2.12                              of this TSI, is provided. The Notified Body is not required to verify the information contained in the documentation provided.                           

##### 6.2.7.*Assessment of units intended to be used in general operation*U.K.

Where a new, upgraded or renewed unit to be used in general operation is subject to assessment against this TSI (in accordance                              with clause 4.1.2), some of the TSI requirements require a reference train for their assessment. This is mentioned in the                              relevant provisions of Section 4.2. Similarly, some of the TSI requirements at train level cannot be assessed at unit level;                              such cases are described for the relevant requirements in Section 4.2 of this TSI.                           

The area of use in terms of type of RST which, coupled with the unit to be assessed, ensures that the train is compliant with                              the TSI is not verified by the Notified Body.                           

After such a unit has received the authorisation to be placed in service, its use in a train formation (whether TSI compliant                              or not) shall be dealt with under the responsibility of the Railway Undertaking, according to the rules defined in clause                              4.2.2.5 of the OPE TSI (train composition).                           

##### [F26.2.7a.*Additional optional requirements for units intended to be used in general operation*U.K.

###### (1)The compliance with the following set of conditions (2) to (9) is optional and only aims to facilitate exchange of units intended                           for general operations. Compliance with these provisions does not assure full interchangeability of units and does not exempt                           the railway undertaking of its responsibilities regarding the use of these units in a train formation as defined in clause                           6.2.7. If the applicant selects this option, a notified body has to assess the compliance within the EC verification procedure.                           This shall be reported in the certificate and in the technical documentation.U.K.

###### (2)The unit shall be fitted with a manual coupling system as defined in clauses 4.2.2.2.3 b) and 5.3.2U.K.

###### (3)The unit shall be fitted with an EN-UIC braking system as defined in the specification referenced in Appendix J-1, index 22.U.K.

###### (4)The unit shall meet the requirements of this TSI at least within the temperature range T1 (– 25 °C to + 40 °C; nominal) as                           defined in clause 4.2.6.1 of this TSI and in the specification referenced in Appendix J-1, index 34.U.K.

###### (5)The tail lights requested in clause 4.2.7.1 shall be provided by fixed tail lamps.U.K.

###### (6)If the unit is fitted with a gangway, the gangway shall fulfil the specification referenced in Appendix J-1, index 113.U.K.

###### (7)Power supply shall be compliant to point 4 of clause 4.2.11.6U.K.

###### (8)The physical interface between units for the signal transmission shall ensure that the cable and plug of at least one line                           is compatible with the 18-conductor cable defined in the plate 2 of the specification referenced in Appendix J-1, index 114.U.K.

###### (9)The unit shall be marked at least with the following markings in accordance with the specification referenced in Appendix                           J-1, index 115:U.K.

          -  Length over buffers                          
          -  Electric power supply.]                          

##### 6.2.8.*Assessment of units intended to be used in predefined formation(s)*U.K.

Where a new, upgraded or renewed unit to be included in predefined formation(s) is subject to assessment (in accordance with                              Chapter 4.1.2), the EC certificate of verification shall identify the formation(s) for which the assessment is valid: the                              type of RST coupled with the unit to be assessed, number of vehicles in the formation(s), arrangement of the vehicles in the                              formation(s) that will ensure that the train formation will be compliant with this TSI.                           

TSI requirements at train level shall be assessed with use of a reference train formation when and as specified in this TSI.

After such a unit has received the authorisation to be placed in service, it may be coupled with other units to constitute                              the formations mentioned in the EC certificate of verification.                           

##### 6.2.9.*Particular case: Assessment of units intended to be included in an existing fixed formation*U.K.

###### 6.2.9.1.*Context*U.K.

This particular case of assessment applies in case of replacement of a part of a fixed formation, which has already been placed                              in service.                           

Two cases are described below, depending on the TSI status of the fixed formation.

The part of the fixed formation subject to the assessment is called ‘unit’ in the text below.

###### 6.2.9.2.*Case of a TSI compliant fixed formation*U.K.

Where a new, upgraded or renewed unit to be included in an existing fixed formation is subject to assessment against this                              TSI, and a valid EC certificate of verification for the existing fixed formation is available, a TSI assessment only for the                              new part of the fixed formation is required in order to update the certificate of the existing fixed formation, which is considered                              as renewed (see also clause 7.1.2.2).                           

###### 6.2.9.3.*Case of a non-TSI compliant fixed formation*U.K.

Where a new, upgraded or renewed unit to be included in an existing fixed formation is subject to assessment against this                              TSI, and a valid EC certificate of verification for the existing fixed formation is not available, the EC certificate of verification                              shall state that the assessment does not cover the TSI requirements applicable to the fixed formation, but only the assessed                              unit.                           

#### 6.3.**Subsystem containing Interoperability constituents not holding an EC declaration**U.K.

##### 6.3.1.*Conditions*U.K.

During the transitional period ending on 31 May 2017, a Notified Body is permitted to issue an EC certificate of verification                              for a subsystem, even if some of the interoperability constituents incorporated within the subsystem are not covered by the                              relevant EC declarations of conformity or suitability for use according to this TSI (non-certified ICs), if the following                              criteria are complied with:                           

The conformity of the subsystem has been checked against the requirements of Section 4 and in relation to Sections 6.2 to                                       7 (except ‘Specific cases’) of this TSI by the Notified Body. Furthermore the conformity of the ICs to Sections 5 and 6.1                                       does not apply, and                                    

The interoperability constituents, which are not covered by the relevant EC declaration of conformity or suitability for use,                                       have been used in a subsystem already approved and put in service in at least one of the Member States before the date of                                       application of this TSI.                                    

EC declarations of conformity or suitability for use shall not be drawn up for the interoperability constituents assessed                              in this manner.                           

##### 6.3.2.*Documentation*U.K.

The EC certificate of verification of the subsystem shall indicate clearly which interoperability constituents have been assessed                              by the Notified Body as part of the subsystem verification.                           

The EC declaration of verification of the subsystem shall indicate clearly:

Which interoperability constituents have been assessed as part of the subsystem;

Confirmation that the subsystem contains the interoperability constituents identical to those verified as part of the subsystem;

For those interoperability constituents, the reason(s) why the manufacturer did not provide an EC declaration of conformity                                       or suitability for use before its incorporation into the subsystem, including the application of national rules notified under                                       [F1Article 14 of Directive (EU) 2016/797].                                    

##### 6.3.3.*Maintenance of the subsystems certified according to clause 6.3.1*U.K.

During the transition period as well as after the transition period has ended, until the subsystem is upgraded, renewed (taking                              into account the MS's decision on application of TSIs), the interoperability constituents which do not hold an EC declaration                              of conformity or suitability for use and of the same type are permitted to be used as maintenance related replacements (spare                              parts) for the subsystem, under the responsibility of the ECM.                           

In any case the ECM must ensure that the components for maintenance related replacements are suitable for their applications,                              are used within their area of use, and enable interoperability to be achieved within the rail system while at the same time                              meeting the essential requirements. Such components must be traceable and certified in accordance with any national or international                              rule, or any code of practice widely acknowledged in the railway domain.                           

### 7.IMPLEMENTATIONU.K.

#### 7.1.**General rules for implementation**U.K.

##### 7.1.1.*Application to newly built rolling stock*U.K.

###### 7.1.1.1.*General*U.K.

This TSI is applicable to all units of rolling stock in its scope which are placed in service after the date of application                              set out in Article 12, except where clause 7.1.1.2 ‘Transition phase’ or clause 7.1.1.3 ‘Application to [F1special vehicles, such as on-track machines]’ or clause 7.1.1.4 ‘Application to vehicle designed to be operated solely on 1 520 mm system’ below apply.                           

This TSI does not apply to units of existing rolling stock which are already placed in service on the network (or part of                              the network) of one Member State at the time when the TSI becomes applicable, as long as they are not upgraded or renewed                              (see clause 7.1.2).                           

Any rolling stock which is produced according to a design developed after the date of application of this TSI shall be compliant                              with this TSI.                           

###### 7.1.1.2.*Transition phase*U.K.

###### 7.1.1.2.1Application of the TSI during transition phaseU.K.

A significant number of projects or contracts, which started before the date of application of this TSI, may lead to the production                              of rolling stock which does not fully comply with this TSI. For rolling stock concerned by those projects or contracts, and                              [F1in accordance with point (f) of Article 4(3) of Directive (EU) 2016/797], a transition phase is defined, during which the application of this TSI is not mandatory.                           

This transition phase applies to:
                -  Projects at advanced stage of development, as defined in the clause 7.1.1.2.2 
                -  Contracts in course of performance, as defined in the clause 7.1.1.2.3 
                -  Rolling stock of an existing design, as defined in clause 7.1.1.2.4. 

[F1The application of this TSI to rolling stock which falls under one of the three cases above is not mandatory if one of the                                 following conditions is met:                            
                -  In case the rolling stock is in the scope of the HS RST TSI 2008 or of the CR LOC&PAS TSI 2011, the relevant TSI(s), including                                       implementation rules and period of validity of the ‘type or design examination certificate’ (7 years) are applied. This provision shall not apply to vehicles that are not conform to the HS RST TSI 2008 or to the CR                                       LOC&PAS TSI 2011 and that are placed on the market after 31 May 2017.                                   
                -  In case the rolling stock is in the scope of neither the HS RST TSI 2008 nor the CR LOC&PAS TSI 2011: the authorisation for                                       placing on the market is delivered during a transition period ending on 31 December 2020.]                                   

During the transition phase, if the applicant chooses not to apply this TSI, it is reminded that the other TSIs and/or notified                              national rules apply according to their respective scopes and implementation rules for the authorisation to place [F1on the market in accordance with Article 21 of Directive (EU) 2016/797].                           

In particular, TSIs to be repealed by this TSI continue to apply, under the conditions stated in Article 11.

###### 7.1.1.2.2Definition of Projects at advanced stage of developmentU.K.

Rolling stock is developed and produced under a project at an advanced stage of development in accordance with the definition                              in [F1point (23) of Article 2 of Directive (EU) 2016/797].                           

The project shall be at an advanced stage of development at the date of application of this TSI.

###### 7.1.1.2.3Definition of Contracts in course of performanceU.K.

Rolling stock is developed and produced under a contract which is signed before the date of application of this TSI.

The applicant has to bring evidence of the date of signature of the original contract applicable. The date of any addenda                              in the form of changes to an original contract shall not be taken into account when defining the date of signature of the                              contract in question.                           

###### 7.1.1.2.4Definition of Rolling Stock of an existing designU.K.

Rolling stock is produced according to a design developed before the date of application of this TSI, and which therefore                              has not been assessed according to this TSI.                           

For the purpose of this TSI, a rolling stock can be qualified as ‘built according to existing design’ when one of the two                              following conditions is met:                           
                -  The applicant can prove that the newly built rolling stock will be produced according to a documented design that has already                                    been used to produce a rolling stock which has been authorised to be placed into service in a Member State before the date                                    of application of this TSI.                                  
                -  The manufacturer or the applicant can prove that the project was in pre-production phase, or in series production at the date                                    of application of this TSI. In order to prove this, at least one prototype shall be in assembly phase with an existing identifiable                                    body shell, and components already ordered from sub-suppliers shall represent 90 % of the total value of components.                                  

The Applicant shall demonstrate to the NSA that the conditions spelled out under the respective bullet point in this clause                              (depending on the situation at hand) are met.                           

For modifications to an existing design, the following rules apply until 31 May 2017:
                -  In case of design modifications strictly limited to those necessary to ensure the technical compatibility of the rolling stock                                    with fixed installations (corresponding to interfaces with infrastructure, energy, or control-command and signalling subsystems),                                    the application of this TSI is not mandatory.                                  
                -  In case of other design modifications, the present clause related to ‘existing design’ does not apply. 

###### 7.1.1.3.*[F1Application to special vehicles, such as on-track machines]*U.K.

The application of this TSI to mobile railway infrastructure construction and maintenance equipment (as defined in Sections                              2.2 and 2.3) is not mandatory.                           

The conformity assessment process as described in the clause 6.2.1 may be used by applicants on a voluntary basis in order                              to establish an EC declaration of verification against this TSI; this EC declaration of verification shall be recognised as                              such by Member States.                           

In case the applicant chooses not to apply this TSI, the mobile railway infrastructure construction and maintenance equipment                              may be authorised [F1in accordance with Article 21 of Directive (EU) 2016/797 against national rules as regards the basic parameters of this TSI].                           

###### 7.1.1.4.*Application to vehicles designed to be operated solely on the 1 520 mm system*U.K.

The application of this TSI to vehicles designed to be operated solely on the 1 520 mm system is not mandatory during a transition                              period ending six years after the date of application of this TSI.                           

The conformity assessment process as described in the clause 6.2.1 may be used by applicants on a voluntary basis in order                              to establish an EC declaration of verification against this TSI; this EC declaration of verification shall be recognised as                              such by Member States.                           

In case the applicant chooses not to apply this TSI, the vehicle may be authorised [F1in accordance with Article 21 of Directive (EU) 2016/797 against national rules as regards the basic parameters of this TSI].                           

###### [F57.1.1.4a.*Transitional measure for on-board energy measurement system requirement*U.K.

Requirements set out in [F14.2.8.2.8.4] are not mandatory during a transition period ending on 1 January 2022 for projects which, on 14 June 2018, are projects at an advanced stage of development, contracts in course of performance and rolling stock of an existing design                        as set out in point 7.1.1.2 of this TSI.                   

When the requirements set out in 4.2.8.2.8.4 are not applied, national rules as regards specification related to interface                        protocols and transferred data format shall apply and the description of on-board to ground communication shall be provided                        in the technical documentation.]                   

###### 7.1.1.5.*Transitional measure for fire safety requirement*U.K.

During a transitional period ending [F1on 1 January 2018], it is permitted, as an alternative to material requirements specified in clause 4.2.10.2.1 of the present TSI, to apply                              the verification of conformity to the material fire safety requirements of the notified national rules (using the appropriate                              operation category) from one of the following sets of standards:                           

The British standards BS6853, GM/RT2130 issue 3.

The French standards NF F 16-101:1988 and NF F 16-102/1992.

The German standard DIN 5510-2:2009 including toxicity measurements.

The Italian standards UNI CEI 11170-1:2005 and UNI CEI 11170-3:2005.

The Polish standards PN-K-02511:2000 and PN-K-02502:1992.

The Spanish standard DT-PCI/5A.

During this period, it is permitted to substitute individual materials by materials which are compliant with EN 45545-2:2013                              (as specified in clause 4.2.10.2.1 of the present TSI).                           

###### 7.1.1.6.*Transitional measure for noise requirements specified in the HS RST TSI 2008*U.K.

For units of maximum design speed higher than or equal to 190 km/h intended to be operated on the High Speed TEN network,                              requirements defined in clause 4.2.6.5 ‘Exterior noise’ and in clause 4.2.7.6 ‘Interior noise’ of the HS RST TSI 2008 shall                              apply.                           

This transitional measure is applicable until a revised TSI Noise covering all types of rolling stock is applicable.

###### 7.1.1.7.*Transitional measure for crosswind requirements specified in the HS RST TSI 2008*U.K.

For units of maximum design speed higher than or equal to 250 km/h intended to be operated on the High Speed TEN network,                              it is permitted to apply requirements defined in clause 4.2.6.3 ‘Crosswind’ of the HS RST TSI 2008, as specified in clause                              4.2.6.2.4 of the present TSI.                           

This transitional measure is applicable until revision of the clause 4.2.6.2.4 of the present TSI.

###### [F27.1.1.8.*Transitional measure for passive safety requirement*U.K.

Requirements set out in 4.2.2.5(6) shall not be mandatory during a transition period ending on 1 January 2022 for locomotives with a single ‘central cab’ which, on 27 May 2019, are projects at an advanced stage of development, contracts in course of performance and rolling stock of an existing design                        as set out in point 7.1.1.2 of this TSI.                   

When the requirements set out in 4.2.2.5(6) are not applied, it is permitted as an alternative method, to demonstrate compliance                        against the requirement of scenario 3 of 4.2.2.5(5) by demonstrating compliance with following criteria:                   
          -  the frame of the locomotive is designed according to the specification referenced in Appendix J-1, index 7 cat L (as already                              specified in clause 4.2.2.4 of this TSI),                          
          -  the distance between the buffers and the cab windscreen is at least 2,5 m.]                          

##### [F17.1.2.*Changes to an existing rolling stock or rolling stock type*U.K.

###### 7.1.2.1.*Introduction*U.K.

###### (1)This clause 7.1.2 defines the principles to be applied by the entities managing the change and authorising entities in line                           with the EC verification procedure described in Article 15(9), Article 21(12) and Annex IV of Directive (EU) 2016/797. This                           procedure is further developed in Article 13, 15 and 16 of Commission Implementing Regulation (EU) 2018/545 (20)  and in Decision 2010/713/EU (21) .U.K.

###### (2)This clause 7.1.2 applies in case of any change(s) to an existing rolling stock or rolling stock type, including renewal or                           upgrade. It does not apply in case of changes:U.K.

          -  that do not introduce a deviation from the technical files accompanying the EC declarations for verification for the subsystems,                              if any, and                          
          -  that do not have an impact on basic parameters not covered by the EC declaration, if any.                          

The holder of the vehicle type authorisation shall provide, under reasonable conditions, the information necessary for assessing                        the changes to the entity managing the change.                   

###### 7.1.2.2.*Rules to manage changes in both rolling stock and rolling stock type*U.K.

###### (1)Parts and basic parameters of the rolling stock that are not affected by the change(s) are exempt from conformity assessment                           against the provisions in this TSI.U.K.

###### (2)Without prejudice to clause 7.1.2.2a, compliance with the requirements of this TSI, the TSI Noise (Commission Regulation (EC)                           No 1304/2014, see clause 7.2 of that TSI) and the TSI PRM (Commission Regulation (EU) No 1300/2014 (22) , see clause 7.2.3 of that TSI) shall only be needed for the basic parameters in this TSI which may be affected by the change(s).U.K.

###### (3)In accordance with Articles 15 and 16 of Commission Implementing Regulation (EU) 2018/545 and Decision 2010/713/EU and by                           application of modules SB, SD/SF or SH1 for the EC verification, and if relevant in accordance with Article 15(5) of Directive                           (EU) 2016/797, the entity managing the change shall inform a notified body of all changes affecting the conformity of the                           subsystem with requirements of the relevant TSI(s) requiring new checks by a notified body. This information shall be provided                           by the entity managing the change with corresponding references to the technical documentation relating to the existing EC                           type or design examination certificate.U.K.

###### (4)Without prejudice of the general safety judgement mandated in article 21(12)(b) of Directive (EU) 2016/797, in case of changes                           requiring reassessment of the safety requirements set out in clauses 4.2.3.4.2, 4.2.3.5.3, 4.2.4.2.2, 4.2.5.3.5, 4.2.5.5.8                           and 4.2.5.5.9, the procedure set out in clause 6.2.3.5 shall be applied. Table 17 sets out when a new authorisation is required.U.K.

###### *Table 17*

###### (4a)Without prejudice of the general safety judgement mandated in Article 21(12)(b) of Directive (EU) 2016/797, in case of changes                           impacting requirements set out in 4.2.4.9, 4.2.9.3.1 and 4.2.10.3.4 which require a new reliability study, a new authorisation                           for placing in the market shall be required unless the NoBo concludes that the safety-related requirements covered by the                           reliability study are improved or maintained. The NoBo will consider in its judgement the revised maintenance and operation                           documentation, where required.U.K.

###### (5)National migration strategies related to the implementation of other TSIs (e.g. TSIs covering fixed installations) shall be                           taken into account when defining to what extent the TSIs covering rolling stock needs to be applied.U.K.

###### (6)The basic design characteristics of the rolling stock are defined in Table 17a and Table 17b. Based on these tables and on                           the safety judgement mandated in Article 21(12)(b) of Directive (EU) 2016/797, the changes shall be categorised as follows:U.K.

15(1)(c) of Commission Implementing Regulation (EU) 2018/545 if they are above the thresholds set out in column 3 and below                                 thresholds set out in column 4 unless the safety judgement mandated in Article 21(12)(b) of Directive (EU) 2016/797 requires                                 to categorise them as 15(1)(d), or                            

15(1)(d) of Commission Implementing Regulation (EU) 2018/545 if they are above the thresholds set out in column 4 or if the                                 safety judgement mandated in Article 21(12)(b) of Directive (EU) 2016/797 requires to categorise them as 15(1)(d).                            

The determination whether the changes are beyond or above the thresholds mentioned above shall be done in reference to the                        values of the parameters at the time of the last authorisation of the rolling stock or rolling stock type,                   

###### (7)Changes not covered by point 7.1.2.2(6) above are deemed not to have any impact on the basic design characteristics and may                           be categorised as 15(1)(a) or 15(1)(b) of Commission Implementing Regulation (EU) 2018/545, unless the safety judgement mandated                           in Article 21(12)(b) of Directive (EU) 2016/797 requires to categorise them as 15(1)(d).U.K.

###### (8)The safety judgement mandated in Article 21(12)(b) of Directive (EU) 2016/797 shall cover changes concerning basic parameters                           of the table of section 3.1, related to all the essential requirements, in particular the requirements ‘Safety’ and ‘Technical compatibility’.U.K.

###### (9)Without prejudice to clause 7.1.2.2a, all changes shall remain compliant with the applicable TSIs regardless their classification.U.K.

###### (10)The replacement of one or more vehicle(s) within a fixed formation after a severe damage does not require a conformity assessment                           against this TSI, as long as the unit or the vehicle(s) are unchanged in technical parameters and function to the ones they                           replace. Such units must be traceable and certified in accordance with any national or international rule, or any code of                           practice widely acknowledged in the railway domain.U.K.

###### *Table 17a*

**Basic design characteristics related to basic parameters set out in the LOC&PAS TSI**

###### *Table 17b*

**Basic design characteristics related to basic parameters set out in the PRM TSI**

###### (11)In order to establish the EC type or design examination certificate, the notified body selected by the entity managing the                           change is permitted to refer to:U.K.

          -  The original EC type or design examination certificate for parts of the design that are unchanged or those that are changed                              but do not affect the conformity of the subsystem, as far as it is still valid (during 7 years phase B period).                          
          -  Additional EC type or design examination certificate (amending the original certificate) for modified parts of the design                              that affect the conformity of the subsystem with the latest revision of this TSI in force at that time.                          

###### (12)In any case, the entity managing the change shall ensure that the technical documentation which is relating to the EC type                           or design examination certificate is updated accordingly.U.K.

###### (13)The updated technical documentation, related to the EC type or design examination certificate is referred to in the technical                           file accompanying the EC declaration of verification issued by the entity managing the change for rolling stock declared as                           conformant to the modified type.U.K.

###### 7.1.2.2a.*Particular rules for existing rolling stock not covered by an EC declaration of verification with a first authorisation for                              placing in service before 1 January 2015*U.K.

###### (1)The following rules apply, in addition to clause 7.1.2.2, to existing rolling stock with a first authorisation for placing                           in service before 1 January 2015, where the scope of the change has an impact on basic parameters not covered by the EC declaration (if any).U.K.

###### (2)The compliance with technical requirements of this TSI is deemed established when a basic parameter is improved in the direction                           of the TSI defined performance and the entity managing the change demonstrates that the corresponding essential requirements                           are met and the safety level is maintained and, where reasonably practicable, improved. The entity managing the change shall in this case justify the reasons for which the TSI defined performance was                           not met, taking into account paragraph 3 of section 7.1.2.2. This justification shall be included in the technical file, if                           any, or in the original technical documentation of the vehicle.U.K.

###### (3)The particular rule set out in paragraph (2) above is not applicable to changes to basic parameters classified as 21(12)(a)                           in table 17c and 17d. For those changes, compliance with the TSI requirements is mandatory.U.K.

###### *Table 17c*

**Changes to basic parameters for which compliance with TSI requirements is mandatory for rolling stock not holding an EC type                              or design examination certificate**

###### *Table 17d*

**Changes to basic parameters of the PRM TSI for which compliance with TSI requirements is mandatory for rolling stock not holding                              an EC type or design examination certificate**

###### 7.1.2.2b.*Particular rules for vehicles modified to test performance or reliability of technological innovations for a limited period                              of time*U.K.

###### (1)The following rules apply, in addition to clause 7.1.2.2, in case of modifications to single authorised vehicles for the purpose                           of testing the performance and reliability of technological innovations for a fixed period of time not longer than 1 year.                           They don't apply if the same modifications are made to several vehicles.U.K.

###### (2)The compliance with technical requirements of this TSI is deemed established when a basic parameter is kept unchanged or improved                           in the direction of the TSI defined performance and the entity managing the change demonstrates that the corresponding essential                           requirements are met and the safety level is maintained and, where reasonably practicable, improved]U.K.

##### 7.1.3.*[F1Rules related to the EC type or design examination certificates]*U.K.

###### [F17.1.3.1.*Rolling stock subsystem*U.K.

###### (1)This clause concerns a rolling stock type (unit type in the context of this TSI), as defined in Article 2(26) of Directive                           (EU) 2016/797, which is subject to a EC type or design verification procedure in accordance with the section 6.2 of this TSI.                           It also applies to the EC type or design verification procedure in accordance with the TSI Noise (Commission Regulation (EU)                           No 1304/2014 (23) ), and the TSI PRM (Commission Regulation (EU) No 1300/2014) which refers to this TSI for its scope of application to Locomotives                           and Passenger rolling Stock.U.K.

###### (2)The TSI assessment basis for a ‘EC type or design examination’ is defined in columns 2 and 3 ‘Design review’ and ‘Type test’ of Appendix H of this TSI.U.K.

###### **Phase A**U.K.

###### (3)Phase A starts once a notified body, which is responsible for EC verification, is appointed by the applicant and ends when                           the EC type or design examination certificate is issued.U.K.

###### (4)The TSI assessment basis for a type is defined for a phase A period, with a duration of maximum seven years. During the phase                           A period the assessment basis for EC verification to be used by the notified body will not change.U.K.

###### (5)When a revision of this TSI or of the TSI Noise or the TSI PRM comes into force during the phase A period, it is permissible                           (but not mandatory) to use the revised version, either totally or for particular sections, unless explicitly otherwise specified                           in the revision of these TSIs; in case of application limited to particular sections, the applicant has to justify and document                           that applicable requirements remain consistent, and this has to be approved by the notified body.U.K.

###### **Phase B**U.K.

###### (6)The phase B period defines the period of validity of the EC type or design examination certificate once it is issued by the                           notified body. During this time, units may be EC certified on the basis of conformity to type.U.K.

###### (7)The EC type or design examination certificate of EC verification for the subsystem is valid for a seven year phase B period                           after its issue date, even if a revision of this TSI or of the TSI Noise or the TSI PRM comes into force, unless explicitly                           otherwise specified in the revision of these TSIs. During this period of validity, new rolling stock of the same type is permitted                           to be placed on the market on the basis of an EC declaration of verification referring to the type certificate of verification.]U.K.

###### 7.1.3.2.*Interoperability constituents*U.K.

This clause concerns an interoperability constituent which is subject to type examination (module CB) or to suitability for                              use (module CV).                           

The type or design examination or suitability for use certificate is valid for a five year period. During this time, new constituents                              of the same type are permitted to be placed into service without a new type assessment. Before the end of the five-year period,                              the constituent shall be assessed according to the latest revision of this TSI in force at that time, for those requirements                              that have changed or are new in comparison to the certification basis.                           

#### 7.2.**Compatibility with other subsystems**U.K.

This TSI has been developed with consideration of other subsystems being compliant to their respective TSIs. Accordingly,                              interfaces with the fixed installations infrastructure, energy and control-command subsystems are addressed for subsystems                              compliant with the TSI Infrastructure, the TSI Energy and the TSI CCS.                           

Following this, the implementation methods and phases concerning rolling stock depend on the progress of implementation of                              the TSI Infrastructure, the TSI Energy and the TSI CCS.                           

Furthermore, TSIs covering the fixed installations allow for a set of different technical characteristics (e.g. ‘traffic code’                              in TSI Infrastructure, ‘power supply system’ in TSI Energy).                           

For rolling stock, the corresponding technical characteristics are recorded in the ‘European register of authorised types                              of vehicles’, according to [F1Article 48 of Directive (EU) 2016/797] and Implementing Decision 2011/665/EU (see also Section 4.8 of this TSI).                           

For fixed installations, they are part of the main features recorded in the ‘Register of infrastructure’, according to [F1Article 48 of Directive (EU) 2016/797 and Commission Implementing Regulation (EU) 2019/777] (24).                           

#### 7.3.**Specific cases**U.K.

##### 7.3.1.*General*U.K.

The specific cases, as listed in the following clause, describe special provisions that are needed and authorised on particular                              networks of each Member State.                           

[F1These specific cases are classified as:                            
                -  ‘P’ cases: ‘permanent’ cases,                                   
                -  ‘T0’: ‘temporary’ cases of indefinite duration, where the target system shall be reached by a date still to be determined.                                   
                -  ‘T1’ cases: ‘temporary’ cases, where the target system shall be reached by 31 December 2025.                                   
                -  ‘T2’ cases: ‘temporary’ cases, where the target system shall be reached by 31 December 2035.                                   

All specific cases and their relevant dates shall be re-examined in the course of future revisions of the TSI with a view                                 to limiting their technical and geographical scope based on an assessment of their impact on safety, interoperability, cross                                 border services, TEN-T corridors, and the practical and economic impacts of retaining or eliminating them. Special account                                 shall be given to availability of EU funding.                            

Specific cases shall be limited to the route or network where they are strictly necessary and taken account of through route                                 compatibility procedures.]                            

Any specific case applicable to the rolling stock in the scope of this TSI shall be addressed in this TSI.

Certain specific cases are in interface to other TSIs. Where a clause in this TSI refers to another TSI to which a specific                              case is applicable, or where a specific case is applicable to the rolling stock as a consequence of a specific case declared                              in another TSI, these are also described in this TSI.                           

Moreover, some specific cases do not prevent the access to the national network to TSI compliant rolling stock. In that case,                              it is explicitly stated in the concerned section of the clause 7.3.2 below.                           

[F2In case of a specific case applicable to a component defined as interoperability constituent in section 5.3 of this TSI, the                                 conformity assessment has to be made according to the clause 6.1.1 point (3).]                            

##### 7.3.2.*List of specific cases*U.K.

###### 7.3.2.1.*Mechanical interfaces (4.2.2.2)*U.K.

###### **Specific case Ireland and UK for Northern Ireland (‘P’)**U.K.

End coupling, height above rail (clause 4.2.2.2.3, Annex A)

###### A.1BuffersU.K.

The height of the centre line of the buffers shall be in the range 1 090 mm (+ 5/– 80 mm) above rail level in all loading                     and wear conditions.                  

###### A.2Screw couplingU.K.

The height of the centre line of the draw hook shall be in the range 1 070 mm (+ 25/– 80 mm) above rail level in all loading                     and wear conditions.                  

###### **Specific case United Kingdom (Great Britain) (‘P’)**U.K.

Staff access for coupling and uncoupling (clause 4.2.2.2.5)

It is permissible for units fitted with manual coupling systems (as per clause 4.2.2.2.3 b) to alternatively comply with the                     national technical rules notified for this purpose.                  

This specific case does not prevent the access of TSI compliant rolling stock to the national network.

###### 7.3.2.2.*Gauging (4.2.3.1)*U.K.

###### **Specific case Ireland and UK for Northern Ireland (‘P’)**U.K.

It is permissible for the reference profile of the upper and the lower part of the unit to be established in accordance with                     the national technical rules notified for this purpose.                  

###### **Specific case the United Kingdom (Great Britain) (‘P’)**U.K.

For technical compatibility with the existing network it is permissible for the profile of the upper and the lower part of                     the unit together with the pantograph gauge to alternatively be established in accordance with the national technical rules                     notified for this purpose.                  

This specific case does not prevent the access of TSI compliant rolling stock to the national network.

###### 7.3.2.3.*Rolling stock requirements for compatibility with trackside equipment (4.2.3.3.2.2)*U.K.

###### **Specific case Finland (‘P’)**U.K.

For rolling stock intended to be used on Finnish network (1 524 mm track gauge) which depends on track side equipment for                     axle bearing condition monitoring, the target areas on the underside of an axle box that shall remain un-obstructed to permit                     observation by a trackside HABD shall use dimensions as defined in EN 15437-1:2009, and replace the values by the following:                  

System based on trackside equipment:

The dimensions in clauses 5.1 and 5.2 of EN 15437-1:2009 are replaced respectively by the following dimensions. There are                     two different target areas (I and II) including their prohibitive and measuring zones defined:                  
          -  *Dimensions for the target area I:*                                       -  WTA, greater than or equal to 50 mm 
            -  LTA, greater than or equal to 200 mm 
            -  YTA shall be 1 045 mm to 1 115 mm 
            -  WPZ, greater than or equal to 140 mm 
            -  LPZ, greater than or equal to 500 mm 
            -  YPZ shall be 1 080 mm ± 5 mm 
          -  *Dimensions for the target area II:*                                       -  WTA, greater than or equal to 14 mm 
            -  LTA, greater than or equal to 200 mm 
            -  YTA shall be 892 mm to 896 mm 
            -  WPZ, greater than or equal to 28 mm 
            -  LPZ, greater than or equal to 500 mm 
            -  YPZ shall be 894 mm ± 2 mm 

###### **Specific case Ireland and UK for Northern Ireland (‘P’)**U.K.

Rolling stock that depends on track side equipment for axle bearing condition monitoring, shall meet the following the target                     areas on the underside of an axle box (dimensions as defined in EN 15437-1:2009):                  

###### *Table 18*

**Target area**

###### F3**Specific case Portugal (‘P’)**U.K.

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

###### F3**Specific case Spain (‘P’)**U.K.

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

###### **[F1Specific case Sweden (‘T1’)]**U.K.

This specific case is applicable to all units which are not fitted with on-board axle bearing condition monitoring equipment                     and are intended for operation on lines with non-upgraded axle bearing detectors. These lines are indicated in the infrastructure                     register as being non-TSI compliant in this respect.                  

The two zones underneath the axle box/journal set out in table below referring to the parameters of the standard EN 15437-1:2009                     shall be free to facilitate vertical monitoring by trackside axle box detection system:                  

###### *Table 19*

**Target and prohibitive zone for units intended to be operated in Sweden**

The compatibility with these systems shall be set out in the technical file for the vehicle.

###### **Specific case the United Kingdom (Great Britain) (‘P’)**U.K.

It is permissible to establish the compatibility with trackside equipment other than that defined in the specification referenced                     in Annex J-1, index 15. In such a case, the characteristics of the trackside equipment the unit is compatible with shall be                     described in the technical documentation (in accordance with point (4) of clause 4.2.3.3.2).                  

###### [F17.3.2.4.*Safety against derailment running on twisted track (4.2.3.4.1)*U.K.

###### **Specific case United Kingdom (Great Britain) (‘P’)**U.K.

It is permissible for all units and cases to use Method 3 set out in EN14363:2016 clause 6.1.5.3.1.                   

This specific case does not prevent the access of TSI compliant rolling stock to the national network.]                   

###### [F17.3.2.5.*Running dynamic behaviour (4.2.3.4.2, 6.2.3.4)*U.K.

###### **Specific case Finland (‘P’)**U.K.

The following modifications to the running dynamic behaviour clauses of the TSI applies to vehicle to be operated solely on                        Finnish 1 524 mm network:                   
          -  Test zone 4 is not applicable for running dynamic testing.                          
          -  Mean value of curve radius of all track sections for test zone 3 shall be 550 ± 50 metres for running dynamic testing.                          
          -  Track quality parameters in running dynamics testing shall be according to RATO 13 (Track inspection).                          
          -  Measuring methods are according to EN 13848:2003+A1.                          

###### **Specific case Ireland and UK for Northern Ireland (‘P’)**U.K.

For technical compatibility with the existing network it is permissible to use notified national technical rules for the purpose                        of assessing running dynamic behaviour.                   

###### **Specific case Spain (‘P’)**U.K.

For rolling stock intended to be used on 1 668 mm track gauge, the quasi-static guiding force Yqst limit value shall be evaluated for curve radii                   

250 m ≤ Rm < 400 m.                   

The limit value shall be: (Yqst)lim = 66 kN.                   

For the normalisation of the estimated value to the radius Rm = 350 m according to clause 7.6.3.2.6 (2) of EN 14363:2016,                        the formula ‘Ya,nf,qst = Ya,f,qst – (10 500 m/Rm – 30) kN’ shall be replaced by ‘Ya,nf,qst = Ya,f,qst – (11 550 m/Rm – 33) kN’.                   

Values of cant deficiency can be adapted to 1 668 mm track gauge by multiplying the corresponding 1 435 mm parameter values by the following conversion factor: 1733/1500.                   

###### **Specific case the United Kingdom (Great Britain) (‘P’)**U.K.

For technical compatibility with the existing network it is permissible to use national technical rules amending EN 14363                        requirements and notified for the purpose of running dynamic behaviour. This specific case does not prevent the access of                        TSI compliant rolling stock to the national network.]                   

###### 7.3.2.6.*Mechanical and geometric characteristics of wheelset and wheel (4.2.3.5.2.1 and 4.2.3.5.2.2)*U.K.

###### **Specific case Estonia, Latvia, Lithuania and Poland for 1 520 mm system (‘P’)**U.K.

The geometrical dimensions of the wheels as defined in Figure 2 shall be compliant with limit values specified in the Table                     20.                  

###### *Table 20*

**In-service limits of the geometric dimensions of wheel**

###### **Specific case Finland (‘P’)**U.K.

The minimum wheel diameter shall be taken as 400 mm.

For rolling stock to be used in traffic between Finnish 1 524 network and a third country 1 520 network, it is allowed to                     use special wheelsets designed to accommodate the differences in track gauges.                  

###### **Specific case Ireland (‘P’)**U.K.

The geometrical dimensions of the wheels (as defined in Figure 2) shall be compliant with limit values specified in the Table                     21:                  

###### *Table 21*

**In-service limits of the geometric dimensions of wheel**

###### **Specific case UK for Northern Ireland (‘P’)**U.K.

The geometrical dimensions of the wheelsets and the wheels (as defined in Figure 1 and 2) shall be compliant with limit values                     specified in the Table 22:                  

###### *Table 22*

**In-service limits of the geometric dimensions of wheelsets and wheel**

###### **[F1Specific case Spain for 1 668 mm track gauge (‘P’)]**U.K.

The minimum value of thickness of the flange (Sd) for wheel diameter D ≥ 840 mm shall be taken as 25 mm.                  

For wheel diameters 330 mm ≤ D < 840 mm, the minimum value shall be taken as 27,5 mm.

###### **Specific case United Kingdom (Great Britain) (‘P’)**U.K.

It is permissible for the geometrical dimensions of the wheels to alternatively be established in accordance with the national                     technical rule notified for this purpose.                  

This specific case does not prevent the access of TSI compliant rolling stock to the national network.

###### [F27.3.2.6a.*Minimum curve radius (4.2.3.6)*U.K.

###### **Specific case Ireland (‘P’)**U.K.

In the case of track gauge system 1 600 mm, the minimum curve radius to be negotiated shall be 105 m for all units.]                   

###### 7.3.2.7.*Emergency braking (4.2.4.5.2)*U.K.

###### **Specific case United Kingdom (Great Britain) (‘P’)**U.K.

It is permissible for units assessed in fixed or predefined formation of design maximum speed higher or equal to 250 km/h,                     for the stopping distance in case of ‘emergency braking performance in normal mode’ to deviate from the minimum values specified                     in point (9) of clause 4.2.4.5.2.                  

###### 7.3.2.8.*Aerodynamic effects (4.2.6.2)*U.K.

###### **Specific case United Kingdom (Great Britain) (‘P’)**U.K.

Head pressure pulse (4.2.6.2.2):

Units with a maximum operating speed higher than 160 km/h and lower than 250 km/h, running in the open air at their maximum                     operating speed shall not cause the maximum peak-to-peak pressure of changes to exceed a value as indicated in the national                     technical rule notified for this purpose.                  

###### **Specific case Italy (‘P’)**U.K.

Maximum pressure variations in tunnels (4.2.6.2.3):

For unrestricted operation on the existing lines taking into account the numerous tunnels with a cross section of 54 m2 which are traversed at 250 km/h, and those with a cross section of 82,5 m2 and traversed at 300 km/h, units of maximum design speed higher than or equal to190 km/h shall conform to the requirements                     set out in the Table 23.                  

###### *Table 23*

**Requirements for interoperable train in a solo run in a non-inclined tube-like tunnel**

If a vehicle does not fulfil the values specified in the table above (e.g. TSI compliant vehicle), operating rules (e.g. speed                     restrictions) may apply.                  

###### 7.3.2.9.*Warning horn sound pressure levels (4.2.7.2.2)*U.K.

###### **Specific case United Kingdom (Great Britain) (‘P’)**U.K.

Vehicle for national use only may be compliant with the horn sound pressure levels as stipulated in the national technical                     rules notified for this purpose.                  

Trains intended for international use shall be compliant with the horn sound pressure levels as specified in clause 4.2.7.2.2                     of this TSI.                  

This specific case does not prevent the access of TSI compliant rolling stock to the national network.

###### 7.3.2.10.*Power supply — general (4.2.8.2)*U.K.

###### **Specific case United Kingdom (Great Britain) (‘P’)**U.K.

It is permissible for electric units to be designed only for operation on lines equipped with the electrification system operating                     at 600/750 V DC as set out in the TSI ENE [F1clause 7.4.2.9.1] and utilising ground level conductor rails in a three and/or four rail configuration; in that case the national technical                     rules notified for this purpose shall apply.                  

###### 7.3.2.11.*Operation within range of voltages and frequencies (4.2.8.2.2)*U.K.

###### **[F1Specific case Estonia (‘T1’)]**U.K.

Electric units designed to be operated on DC 3,0 kV lines shall be able to operate within the ranges of voltages and frequencies                     as set out in the TSI ENE clause 7.4.2.1.1.                  

###### **[F1Specific case France (‘T2’)]**U.K.

Electric units designed to be operated on DC 1,5 kV existing lines shall be able to operate within the ranges of voltages                     and frequencies as set out in the TSI ENE clause 7.4.2.2.1.                  

The maximum current at standstill per pantograph (4.2.8.2.5) allowed on DC 1,5 kV existing lines may be lower than the limit                     values as set out in the TSI ENE clause 4.2.5; the current at standstill per pantograph shall be limited accordingly on electric                     units designed to be operated on these lines.                  

###### **[F1Specific case Latvia (‘T1’)]**U.K.

Electric units designed to be operated on DC 3,0 kV lines shall be able to operate within the ranges of voltages and frequencies                     as set out in the TSI ENE [F1clause 7.4.2.4.1].                  

###### **Specific case United Kingdom (Great Britain) (‘P’)**U.K.

It is permissible for electric units to be equipped with automatic regulation within abnormal operation condition regarding                     voltage as set out in the national technical rule notified for this purpose.                  

This specific case does not prevent the access of TSI compliant rolling stock to the national network.

###### 7.3.2.12.*Use of regenerative brakes (4.2.8.2.3)*U.K.

###### **Specific case Belgium [F1(‘T1’)]**U.K.

For technical compatibility with the existing system, the maximum voltage regenerated to the catenary (Umax2 according to                     EN 50388:2012 clause 12.1.1) on 3 kV network shall not be higher than 3,8 kV.                  

###### **Specific case Czech Republic (‘T’)**U.K.

For technical compatibility with the existing system, the maximum voltage regenerated to the catenary (Umax2 according to                     EN 50388:2012 clause 12.1.1) on 3 kV network shall not be higher than 3,55 kV.                  

###### **Specific case Sweden (‘T’)**U.K.

For technical compatibility with the existing system, the maximum voltage regenerated to the catenary (Umax2 according to                     EN 50388:2012 clause 12.1.1) on 15 kV network shall not be higher than 17,5 kV.                  

###### 7.3.2.13.*Height of interaction with contact wires (RST level) (4.2.8.2.9.1.1)*U.K.

###### **Specific case United Kingdom (Great Britain) (‘P’)**U.K.

For technical compatibility with existing lines, the installation of a pantograph on an electric unit shall allow mechanical                     contact of the contact wires at the extended range of wire heights in accordance with the national technical rules notified                     for this purpose.                  

###### 7.3.2.14.*Pantograph head geometry (4.2.8.2.9.2)*U.K.

###### **[F1Specific case Croatia (‘T1’)]**U.K.

For operation on the existing network 3 kV DC system, it is allowed to equip electric units with a pantograph having a head                     geometry of length 1 450 mm as depicted in EN 50367:2012, Annex B.2 figure B.1 (as alternative to requirement in clause 4.2.8.2.9.2).                  

###### **[F1Specific case Finland (‘T1’)]**U.K.

For technical compatibility with the existing network, the width of the pantograph head shall not exceed 0.422 metres.

###### **[F1Specific case France (‘T2’)]**U.K.

For operation on the existing network, in particular on lines with catenary system only compatible with narrow pantograph,                     and for operation in France and Switzerland, it is allowed to equip electric units with a pantograph having a head geometry                     of length 1 450 mm as depicted in EN 50367:2012, Annex B.2 figure B.1 (as alternative to requirement in clause 4.2.8.2.9.2).                  

###### **[F1Specific case Italy (‘T0’)]**U.K.

For operation on the existing network 3 kV DC system (and additionally in Switzerland on 15 kV AC system), it is allowed to                     equip electric units with a pantograph having a head geometry of length 1 450 mm as depicted in EN 50367:2012, Annex B.2 figure                     B.1 (as alternative to requirement in clause 4.2.8.2.9.2).                  

###### **[F1Specific case Portugal (‘T0’)]**U.K.

For operation on the existing network 25 kV 50 Hz system, it is allowed to equip electric units with a pantograph having a                     head geometry of length 1 450 mm as depicted in EN 50367:2012, Annex B.2 figure B.1 (as alternative to requirement in clause                     4.2.8.2.9.2).                  

For operation on the existing network 1,5 kV DC system, it is allowed to equip electric units with a pantograph having a head                     geometry of length 2 180 mm as depicted in national rule notified for this purpose (as alternative to requirement in clause                     4.2.8.2.9.2).                  

###### **[F1Specific case Slovenia (‘T0’)]**U.K.

For operation on the existing network 3 kV DC system, it is allowed to equip electric units with a pantograph having a head                     geometry of length 1 450 mm as depicted in EN 50367:2012, Annex B.2 figure B.1 (as alternative to requirement in clause 4.2.8.2.9.2).                  

###### **[F1Specific case Sweden (‘T1’)]**U.K.

For operation on the existing network, it is allowed to equip electric units with a pantograph having a head geometry of length                     1 800 mm as depicted in EN 50367:2012, Annex B.2 figure B.5 (as alternative to requirement in clause 4.2.8.2.9.2).                  

###### **Specific case United Kingdom (Great Britain) (‘P’)**U.K.

For operation on the existing network, it is allowed to equip electric units with a pantograph having a head geometry of length                     1 600 mm as depicted in EN 50367:2012, Annex B.2 figure B.6 (as alternative to requirement in clause 4.2.8.2.9.2).                  

###### 7.3.2.15.*Contact strip material (4.2.8.2.9.4.2)*U.K.

###### **Specific case France (‘P’)**U.K.

The metallic content of the carbon contact strips is allowed to be increased up to 60 % by weight where used on 1 500 V DC                     lines.                  

###### 7.3.2.16.*Pantograph contact force and dynamic behaviour (4.2.8.2.9.6)*U.K.

###### **[F1Specific case France (‘T2’)]**U.K.

For technical compatibility with the existing network, electric units intended to be operated on DC 1,5 kV lines shall, in                     addition to the requirement of clause 4.2.8.2.9.6, be validated with consideration of a mean contact force in the following                     range: 70 N < Fm< 0,00178*v2 + 110 N with a value of 140 N at standstill.                  

The conformity assessment procedure (simulation and/or test according to clauses 6.1.3.7 and 6.2.3.20) shall take into account                     the following environmental conditions:                  

:

ambient temperature ≥ 35 °C; contact wire temperature > 50 °C for simulation.

:

ambient temperature 0 °C; contact wire temperature 0 °C for simulation.

###### **[F1Specific case Sweden (‘T1’)]**U.K.

For technical compatibility with the existing network in Sweden, the static contact force of the pantograph shall fulfil the                     requirements in EN 50367:2012 Annex B Table B3 column SE (55 N). The compatibility with these requirements shall be set out                     in the technical file for the vehicle.                  

###### **Specific case United Kingdom (Great Britain) (‘P’)**U.K.

For technical compatibility with existing lines, the verification at interoperability constituent level (clause 5.3.10 and                     6.1.3.7.) shall validate capability of the pantograph to collect current for the additional range of contact wire heights                     between 4 700 mm and 4 900 mm.                  

###### **Specific case Channel tunnel (‘P’)**U.K.

For technical compatibility with existing lines, the verification at interoperability constituent level (clause 5.3.10 and                     6.1.3.7.) shall validate capability of the pantograph to collect current for the additional range of contact wire heights                     between 5 920 mm and 6 020 mm.                  

###### 7.3.2.17.*Driver's cab emergency exit (4.2.9.1.2.2)*U.K.

###### **Specific case United Kingdom (Great Britain) (‘P’)**U.K.

It is permissible for the interior exit to have a minimum access area and a minimum clearance of height and width, in accordance                     with the national technical rules notified for this purpose.                  

This specific case does not prevent the access of TSI compliant rolling stock to the national network.

###### 7.3.2.18.*Front visibility (4.2.9.1.3.1)*U.K.

###### **Specific case United Kingdom (Great Britain) (‘P’)**U.K.

Instead of the requirements set out in 4.2.9.1.3.1, for rolling stock intended for operation in the UK, the following specific                     case shall be complied with.                  

The driver's cab shall be designed to allow the driver at his seated driving position a clear and unobstructed line of sight                     in order to distinguish fixed signals in accordance with the national technical rule, GM/RT2161 ‘Requirements for driving                     cabs of railway vehicles’.                  

This specific case does not prevent the access of TSI compliant rolling stock to the national network.

###### 7.3.2.19.*Driver's desk — Ergonomics (4.2.9.1.6)*U.K.

###### **Specific case United Kingdom (Great Britain) (‘P’)**U.K.

In case the requirements in clause 4.2.9.1.6, last paragraph, related to the direction of movement of the lever for traction                     and/or braking is incompatible with the safety management system of the railway undertaking operating in Great Britain, it                     is allowed to inverse the direction of movement for braking and traction respectively.                  

###### 7.3.2.20.*Fire safety and evacuation (4.2.10)*U.K.

###### **[F1Specific case Italy (‘T0’)]**U.K.

Additional specifications for units intended to be operated in the existing Italian tunnels are detailed below.

###### ***Fire detection systems (clauses 4.2.10.3.2 and 6.2.3.23)***U.K.

In addition to the areas specified in clause 6.2.3.23, fire detection systems shall be installed in all passenger and train                     staff areas.                  

###### ***Fire containment and control systems for passenger rolling stock (clause 4.2.10.3.4)***U.K.

In addition to requirements of the clause 4.2.10.3.4, units of category A and B passenger rolling stock shall be equipped                     with active Fire Containment and Control Systems.                  

Fire Containment and Control Systems shall be assessed according to the notified National Rules about fire automatic extinguishing                     systems.                  

In addition to the requirements specified in clause 4.2.10.3.4, the units of category A and B passenger rolling stock shall                     be equipped with automatic fire extinguishing systems in all technical areas.                  

###### ***Freight locomotives and freight self-propelling units: fire spreading protection measures (clause 4.2.10.3.5) and running                              capability (clause 4.2.10.4.4)***U.K.

In addition to the requirements specified in clause 4.2.10.3.5, freight locomotives and freight self-propelling units shall                     be equipped with fire automatic extinguishing systems in all technical areas.                  

In addition to the requirements specified in clause 4.2.10.4.4, freight locomotives and freight self-propelling units shall                     have a running capability equivalent to that of category B passenger rolling stock.                  

###### **[F2Review clause:**U.K.

At the latest by 31 July 2025, the Member State shall deliver to the Commission a report on possible alternatives to the above additional specifications,                        in order to remove or significantly reduce the constraints on rolling stocks caused by the non-compliance of the tunnels with                        the TSIs.]                   

###### 7.3.2.21.*Running capability (4.2.10.4.4) and fire containment and control system (4.2.10.3.4)*U.K.

###### **[F1Specific case Channel Tunnel (‘P’)]**U.K.

Passenger rolling stock intended to be operated in the Channel Tunnel shall be of category B, considering the length of the                     tunnel.                  

Due to the lack of firefighting points with safe area (see TSI SRT, clause 4.2.1.7) amendments to the following clauses apply:
          -  **clause 4.2.10.4.4 (3):**                           The running capability of a Passenger rolling stock intended to be operated in the Channel Tunnel shall be demonstrated by                           application of the specification referenced in Annex J-1, index 63, in which the system functions impacted by a ‘type 2’ fire                           shall be braking and traction; these functions shall be assessed in the following conditions                                      -  for a duration of 30 minutes at a minimum speed of 100 km/h, or 
            -  for a duration of 15 minutes at a minimum speed of 80 km/h (according to clause 4.2.10.4.4) under the condition specified                                 in the national rule notified by the Channel tunnel safety authority for this purpose. 
          -  **clause 4.2.10.3.4 (3) & (4):**                           Where the running capability is specified for a duration of 30 minutes according to the point above, the fire barrier between                           the driver's cab and the compartment to the rear of it (assuming the fire starts in the rear compartment) shall satisfy requirements                           for integrity for a minimum of 30 minutes (instead of 15 minutes).                          Where the running capability is specified for a duration of 30 minutes according to the point above, and for passenger vehicles                           that do not allow the exit of passengers at both ends (no through route), measures to control the spread of heat and fire                           effluents (full cross section partitions or other FCCS, fire barriers between combustion engine/electrical supply/traction                           equipment and passenger/staff areas) shall be designed for a minimum of 30 minutes fire protection (instead of 15 minutes).                         

###### 7.3.2.22.*Interface for toilet discharge (4.2.11.3)*U.K.

###### **Specific case Finland (‘P’)**U.K.

Alternatively to, or in addition to what is specified in clause 4.2.11.3, it is allowed to install connections for toilet                     discharge and for rinsing of the sanitary discharge tanks, compatible with the track side installations on the Finnish network                     in accordance with figure AI1.                  

Figure AI 1. Emptying connections for toilet tank

###### 7.3.2.23.*Interface for water refilling (4.2.11.5)*U.K.

###### **Specific case Finland (‘P’)**U.K.

Alternatively to, or in addition to what is specified in clause 4.2.11.5, it is allowed to install water filling connections                     compatible with the track side installations on the Finnish network in accordance with Figure AII1.                  

Figure A II1 The water filling adapters

###### **Specific case Ireland and UK for Northern Ireland (‘P’)**U.K.

Alternatively to, or in addition to what is specified in clause 4.2.11.5 of this TSI, it is allowed to install a nozzle type                     water refilling interface. This nozzle type refilling interface must fulfil the requirements of the national technical rules                     notified for the purpose.                  

###### 7.3.2.24.*Special requirements for stabling of trains (4.2.11.6)*U.K.

###### **Specific case Ireland and UK for Northern Ireland (‘P’)**U.K.

Shore supply of electrical power to stabled trains must fulfil the requirements of the national technical rules notified for                     the purpose                  

###### **Specific case the United Kingdom (Great Britain) (‘P’)**U.K.

It is permissible for the local external auxiliary power supply 400 V to be provided in accordance with the national technical                     rules notified for this purpose.                  

###### 7.3.2.25.*Refuelling equipment (4.2.11.7)*U.K.

###### **Specific case Finland (‘P’)**U.K.

In order to be able to be refuelled on the Finnish network, the fuel tank of units with a diesel filling interface has to                     be equipped with the over flow controller according to standards SFS 5684 and SFS 5685.                  

###### **Specific case Ireland and UK for Northern Ireland (‘P’)**U.K.

The refuelling equipment interface must fulfil the requirements of the national technical rules notified for the purpose.

###### 7.3.2.26.*Rolling stock originated from third country (general)*U.K.

###### **Specific case Finland**U.K.

(‘P’) The application of national technical rules instead of the requirements in this TSI is allowed for third countries'                     rolling stock to be used on the Finnish 1 524 network in traffic between Finland and 3rd countries 1 520 network                  

###### [F27.3.2.27.*Rules to manage changes in both rolling stock and rolling stock type (7.1.2.2)*U.K.

###### **Specific case the United Kingdom (Great Britain) (‘P’)**U.K.

Any change to a vehicle swept envelope as defined in the national technical rules notified for the gauging process (for example                        as described in RIS-2773-RST) will be categorised as 15(1) (c) of Commission Implementing Regulation (EU) 2018/545, and will                        not be classified as 21(12)(a) of Directive (EU) 2016/797.]                   

#### 7.4.**Specific environmental conditions**U.K.

##### *Specific conditions Austria*U.K.

Unrestricted access in Austria under winter conditions is granted if the following conditions are met:
          -  The additional capability of the obstacle deflector to remove snow as specified for snow, ice and hail severe conditions in                           clause 4.2.6.1.2 shall be provided.                         
          -  Locomotives and power head units shall be provided with sanding devices. 

##### *Specific conditions Estonia*U.K.

For unrestricted access of rolling stock on the Estonia network under winter conditions, it shall be demonstrated that the                     rolling stock meets the following requirements:                  
          -  Temperature zone T2 as specified in clause 4.2.6.1.1 shall be selected. 
          -  Snow, ice and hail severe conditions as specified in clause 4.2.6.1.2, excluding the scenario ‘Snowdrift’ shall be selected. 

##### *Specific conditions Finland*U.K.

For unrestricted access of rolling stock on the Finnish network under winter conditions, it shall be demonstrated that the                     rolling stock meets the following requirements:                  
          -  Temperature zone T2 as specified in clause 4.2.6.1.1 shall be selected 
          -  Snow, ice and hail severe conditions as specified in clause 4.2.6.1.2, excluding the scenario ‘Snowdrift’ shall be selected 
          -  Regarding the braking system, unrestricted access in Finland under winter conditions is granted if the following conditions                           are met:                                      -  at least half of the bogies are equipped with a magnetic track brake for trainset or passenger coach of nominal speed exceeding                                 140 km/h.                               
            -  all bogies are equipped with a magnetic track brake for trainset or passenger coach of nominal speed exceeding 180 km/h. 

##### *Specific conditions France*U.K.

Unrestricted access in France under winter conditions is granted if the following condition is met:
          -  locomotives and power head units shall be provided with sanding devices. 

##### *Specific conditions Greece*U.K.

For unrestricted access to the Greek network under summer conditions, temperature zone T3 as specified in clause 4.2.6.1.1                     shall be selected.                  

##### *Specific conditions Germany*U.K.

Unrestricted access in Germany under winter conditions, is granted if the following condition is met:
          -  locomotives and power head units shall be provided with sanding devices. 

##### *Specific conditions Portugal*U.K.

For unrestricted access to the Portuguese network under summer conditions, temperature zone T3 as specified in clause 4.2.6.1.1                     shall be selected.                  

##### *Specific conditions Spain*U.K.

For unrestricted access to the Spanish network under summer conditions, temperature zone T3 as specified in clause 4.2.6.1.1                     shall be selected.                  

##### *Specific conditions Sweden*U.K.

For unrestricted access of rolling stock on the Swedish network under winter conditions, it shall be demonstrated that the                     rolling stock meets the following requirements:                  
          -  Temperature zone T2 as specified in clause 4.2.6.1.1 shall be selected 
          -  Snow, ice and hail severe conditions as specified in clause 4.2.6.1.2 shall be selected 

#### 7.5.**Aspects that have to be considered in the revision process or in other activities of the Agency**U.K.

Further to the analysis performed during the drafting process of this TSI, particular aspects have being identified as of                     interest for the future development of the EU railway system.                  

These aspects are of 3 different groups:

Those already subject of a basic parameter in this TSI, with a possible evolution of the corresponding specification when                              the TSI will be revised.                           

Those not considered in the current state of the art as basic parameter, but which are subject to research projects.

Those relevant in the framework of ongoing studies related to the EU railway system, which are not in the scope of TSIs.

These aspects are identified below, classified according to the breakdown of the clause 4.2 of the TSI.

##### 7.5.1.*Aspects related to a basic parameter in this TSI*U.K.

###### 7.5.1.1.*Axle load parameter (clause 4.2.3.2.1)*U.K.

This basic parameter covers the interface between infrastructure and rolling stock regarding the vertical load.

According to the TSI INF, the lines are classified as specified in the standard EN 15528:2008. This standard specifies also                     a categorization of railway vehicles, for freight wagons and particular types of locomotives and passenger vehicles; it will                     be revised to cover all types of rolling stock, and to cover HS lines.                  

When this revision will be available, it may be of interest to include in the EC certificate delivered by the Notified Body                     the ‘design’ classification of the unit under assessment:                  
          -  Classification corresponding to the design mass under normal payload. 
          -  Classification corresponding to the design mass under exceptional payload. 

This aspect will have to be considered when revising this TSI, which already requires in its present version to record all                     data necessary to determine these classifications.                  

It has to be noted that the requirement to the railway undertaking to define and control the operational load, as specified                     in the clause 4.2.2.5 of the TSI OPE will remain unchanged.                  

###### 7.5.1.2.*Aerodynamic effects — Cross wind (clause 4.2.6.2.4)*U.K.

Requirements on ‘cross wind’ have been set up for units of maximum design speed equal to or higher than 250 km/h with 2 options:
          -  in consistency with the TSI HS RST 2008, or 
          -  in consistency with the TSI CR LOC&PAS 2011. 

This will need to be reviewed when the merging of the 2 sets of characteristics wind curves specified in the TSI HS RST 2008                     will be finalised.                  

###### [F27.5.1.3.*Aerodynamic effects on ballasted tracks (clause 4.2.6.2.5)*U.K.

Requirements on aerodynamic effects on ballasted tracks have been set up for units of maximum design speed higher than 250                        km/h.                   

As the current state of the art does not allow to provide for a harmonized requirement nor assessment methodology, the TSI                        allows the application of national rules.                   

This will need to be reviewed in order to consider the following:                   
          -  Study of ballast-pick-up occurrences, and corresponding safety impact (if any)                          
          -  Development of a harmonized, cost-effective methodology applicable in EU.]                          

##### 7.5.2.*Aspects not related to a basic parameter in this TSI but subject to research projects*U.K.

###### 7.5.2.1.*Additional requirements for security reasons*U.K.

The interior of vehicles interfacing with passengers and train crew should provide protection of the occupants in the event                     of a collision by providing means of:                  
          -  minimising the risk of injury due to secondary impact with such furniture and interior fixtures and fittings 
          -  minimising those injuries that may preclude subsequent escape 

Some EU research projects have been launched in 2006 to study the consequence of railway accidents (collision, derailment...)                     on passengers, to evaluate in particular the risk and level of injuries; the objective is to define requirements and corresponding                     conformity assessment procedures related to the railway vehicles interior layouts and components.                  

This TSI already provides a number of specifications in order to cover such risks, for example, Sections 4.2.2.5, 4.2.2.7,                     4.2.2.9 and 4.2.5.                  

More recently, studies have been launched at Member State level and at European level (by the Commission joint research centre)                     regarding the protection of the passengers in the event of terrorist attack.                  

The Agency will follow these studies, and will consider their outcome to define if additional basic parameters or requirements                     covering the risk of injuries of passengers in case of accident or terrorist attack shall be recommended to the Commission.                     Where appropriate this TSI shall be amended.                  

Pending the revision of this TSI Member States may use national rules to cover such risks. In any case this shall not prevent                     the access of TSI compliant rolling stock operating across Member State borders onto their national network.                  

###### [F27.5.2.2.*Conditions for having an authorization for placing on the market not limited to particular networks*U.K.

In order to facilitate free circulation of locomotives and passenger coaches, conditions for having an authorization for placing                        on the market not limited to particular networks have been developed during the preparation of ERA recommendation ERA-REC-111-2015-REC                        of 17 December 2015.                   

These provisions should be further developed to adapt them to Directive (EU) 2016/797 and to take into account the cleaning                        up of national technical rules, with particular focus on passenger coaches.]                   

###### [F27.5.2.3.*Rules for extension of area of use for existing rolling stock not covered by an EC declaration of verification*U.K.

Pursuant to Article 54(2) and (3) of Directive (EU) 2016/797, vehicles authorised for placing in service prior to 15 June 2016 shall receive an authorization for placing on the market according to Article 21 of Directive (EU) 2016/797 in order to operate                        on one or more networks which are not yet covered by their authorisation. Such vehicles shall thus be conform to this TSI                        or benefit from a non-application of this TSI pursuant to Article 7(1) of Directive 2016/797/EC.                   

In order to facilitate the free movement of vehicles, provisions shall be developed to set out which level of flexibility                        could be granted to such vehicles as well as to vehicles which were not subject to authorization, as regards compliance with                        the TSI requirements while fulfilling the essential requirements, maintaining the appropriate safety level, and where reasonably                        practicable, improving it.]                   

##### 7.5.3.*Aspects relevant for the EU railway system but out of the scope of TSI's*U.K.

###### 7.5.3.1.*Track interaction (clause 4.2.3) — Flange or track lubrication*U.K.

During the drafting process of this TSI, it has been concluded that the ‘flange or track lubrication’ is not a basic parameter                     (no link to essential requirements as defined in [F1Directive (EU) 2016/797]).                  

Nevertheless, it appears that the actors of the railway sector (IMs, RUs, NSAs) need a support from the Agency in order to                     move from the current practices to an approach that will ensure transparency and will avoid any unjustified barrier to the                     circulation of rolling stock on the EU network.                  

To that end, the Agency has suggested to launch a study together with the railway sector, with the objective to clarify the                     key technical and economic aspects of this function, considering the current situation:                  
          -  Lubrication is required by some infrastructure managers, but also forbidden by others. 
          -  Lubrication may be provided by means of fixed installation designed by the infrastructure manager or by means of on board                           device to be provided by the railway undertaking.                         
          -  Different ways of lubrication have been investigated by the railway sector. 
          -  Environmental aspects have to be considered when releasing grease along the track. 

In any case, it is planned to include in the ‘Infrastructure register’ information on ‘flange or rail lubrication’, and the                     ‘European register of authorised types of vehicles’ will mention if the rolling stock is fitted with on-board flange lubrication.                     The study mentioned above will clarify operating rules.                  

In the meantime, Member States may continue to use national rules in order to cover this issue of the vehicle-track interface.                     Those rules shall be made available either through notification to the Commission [F1in accordance with article 14 of Directive (EU) 2016/797 or through the Infrastructure Register referred to in article 49                        of the same Directive].                  

### APPENDICES

### [F1Appendix AIntentionally deleted]

### Appendix B1 520 mm system gauge ‘T’

Reference profile for the track gauge 1 520‘T’ of the upper parts (for rolling stock):

Reference profile for the lower parts:

*Note:* For the rolling stock which is intend to be used on track of 1 520 mm, with the exception to pass over of marshalling humps                     equipped with rail brakes.U.K.                  

Reference profile for the lower parts:

*Note:* For the rolling stock which is intend to be used on track of 1 520 mm, able to pass over marshalling humps and rail brakes.U.K.                  

### Appendix CSpecial provisions for on track machines (OTM)

#### C.1**Strength of vehicle structure**U.K.

The requirements of the clause 4.2.2.4 of this TSI are complemented as follow:

The machine frame shall be able to withstand either the static loads of the specification referenced in Annex J-1, index 7                     or the static loads according to the specification referenced in Annex J-1, index 102 without exceeding the permissible values                     given there in.                  

The corresponding structural category of the specification referenced in Annex J-1, index 102 is as follows:
          -  for machines not permitted to be loose shunted or hump shunted: F-II; 
          -  for all other machines: F-I. 

The acceleration in x-direction according to the specification referenced in Annex J-1, index 7, Table 13 or to the specification                     referenced in Annex J-1, index 102, Table 10 shall be ± 3 g.                  

#### C.2**Lifting and jacking**U.K.

The machine body shall incorporate lifting points by which the whole machine is capable of being safely lifted or jacked.                     The location of the lifting and jacking points shall be defined.                  

To facilitate the work during repair or inspection or when on-tracking the machines, the machines shall be provided on both                     long sides with at least two lifting points, at which the machines can be lifted in empty or loaded condition.                  

To allow positioning of jacking devices, clearances shall be provided under the lifting points which shall not be blocked                     by the presence of non-removable parts. The load cases shall be consistent with the ones chosen in Appendix C.1 of this TSI                     and shall apply for lifting and jacking under workshop and servicing operations.                  

#### [F1C.3**Running dynamic behaviour**U.K.

The running characteristics are permitted to be determined by running tests or by reference to a similar type approved machine                        as detailed in clause 4.2.3.4.2 of this TSI or by simulation.                   

The following additional deviations from the specification referenced in Annex J-1, index 16 apply:                   
          -  The test shall always be taken as the simplified method for this type of machines                          
          -  when running tests according to the specification referenced in Annex J-1, index 16 are done with wheel profile in new condition,                              these are valid for a maximum distance of 50 000 km. After 50 000 km it is necessary to:                                       -  either re-profile the wheels;                                
            -  or calculate the equivalent conicity of the worn profile and check that it does not differ more than 50 % from the value of                                    the test of the specification referenced in Annex J-1, index 16 (with a maximum difference of 0,05);                                
            -  or make a new test according to the specification referenced in Annex J-1, index 16 with worn wheel profile;  
          -  in general, stationary tests to determine the parameters of characteristic running gear in accordance with to the specification                              referenced in Annex J-1, index 16, clause 5.3.1 are not necessary;                          
          -  if the required test speed cannot be obtained by the machine itself, the machine shall be hauled for the tests.                          

Running behaviour can be proven by simulation of the tests described in to the specification referenced in Annex J-1, index                        16 (with the exceptions as specified above) when there is a validated model of representative track and operating conditions                        of the machine.                   

A model of a machine for simulation of running characteristics shall be validated by comparing the model results against the                        results of running tests when the same input of track characteristic is used.                   

A validated model is a simulation model that has been verified by an actual running test that excites the suspension sufficiently                        and where there is a close correlation between the results of the running test and the predictions from the simulation model                        over the same test track.]                   

### Appendix D[F1Intentionally deleted]

### Appendix EAnthropometric measurements of the driver

The following data represents the ‘state of the art’ and shall be used.

*Note:* they will be subject of an EN standard currently under drafting process.U.K.                  
          -  Principal anthropometric measurements of the shortest and tallest driving staff:  The dimensions given in Appendix E of the UIC 651 (4th edition, July 2002) shall be taken into consideration. 
          -  Additional anthropometric dimensions of the shortest and tallest driving staff:  The dimensions given in Appendix G of the UIC 651 (4th edition, July 2002) shall be taken into consideration. 

### Appendix FFront visibility

The following data represents the ‘state of the art’ and shall be used.

*Note:* they will be subject of an EN standard currently under drafting process.U.K.                  

#### F.1.**General**U.K.

The design of the cab shall support the drivers' view of all external information that form part of the driving task as well                     as protecting the driver from external sources of visual interference. This shall include the following:                  
          -  Flicker at the lower edge of the windscreen, which can cause fatigue, shall be reduced 
          -  Protection shall be provided from the sun and glare of headlights from oncoming trains, without reducing the drivers' view                           of external signs, signals and other visual information                         
          -  Location of cab equipment shall not block or distort the drivers view of external information 
          -  The dimension, location, shape and finishes (including maintenance) of the windows shall not inhibit the drivers external                           view and shall support the driving task                         
          -  The location, type and quality of windscreen cleaning and clearance devices shall ensure that the driver is able to maintain                           a clear external view in most weather and operating conditions, and shall not inhibit the drivers external view.                         
          -  The driver's cab shall be designed in such a way that the driver is facing forwards when driving. 
          -  The driver's cab shall be designed to allow the driver at his seated driving position a clear and unobstructed line of sight                           in order to distinguish fixed signals set to both the left and right of the track, as defined in Appendix D of the UIC 651(4th                           edition, July 2002).                         

*Note:* the position of the seat in the Appendix D mentionned here above has to be considered as an example; the TSI does not impose                     the position of the seat (left, central or right) in the cab; the TSI does not impose the standing driving position on all                     types of units.U.K.                  

The rules expressed in the Appendix above govern the conditions of visibility for each running direction along straight track                     and in curves with a radius of 300 m and more. They apply to the position(s) of the driver.                  

##### *Notes:*U.K.

          -  in case of cab fitted with 2 driver's seats (option with 2 driving positions), they apply to the 2 seated positions. 
          -  for locomotives with central cab and for OTMs, the clause 4.2.9.1.3.1 of the TSI specify particular conditions. 

#### F.2.**Reference position of vehicle in relation to track:**U.K.

The clause 3.2.1 of the UIC 651(4th edition, July 2002) shall apply.

The supplies and payload shall be considered as defined in the specification referenced in Annex J-1, index 13 and clause                     4.2.2.10 of this TSI.                  

#### F.3.**Reference position for the eyes of crew members**U.K.

The clause 3.2.2 of the UIC 651(4th edition, July 2002) shall apply.

The distance from the driver's eyes in seating posture to the windscreen shall be higher than or equal to 500 mm.

#### F.4.**Conditions of visibility**U.K.

The clause 3.3 of the UIC 651(4th edition, July 2002) shall apply.

*Note:* the clause 3.3.1 of the UIC 651 refers for the standing position to its clause 2.7.2, specifying a minimum distance of 1.8                     meters between floor and top edge of the front window.U.K.                  

### Appendix GServicing

Connections for the toilet discharge system on rolling stock:

*Figure G1*

**Evacuation nozzle (Inner part)**

General tolerances +/– 0,1

Material: stainless steel

*Figure G2*

**Optional flushing connection for the toilet tank (Inner part)**

General tolerances +/– 0,1

Material: stainless steel

### [F1Appendix H

#### **Assessment of the rolling stock subsystem**U.K.

##### H.1**Scope**U.K.

This Appendix indicates the assessment of conformity of the rolling stock subsystem.                   

##### H.2**Characteristics and modules**U.K.

The sub-system characteristics to be assessed in the different phases of design, development and production are marked by                        X in Table H.1. A cross in column 4 of Table H.1 indicates that the relevant characteristics shall be verified by testing                        each single subsystem.                   

###### *Table H.1*

**Assessment of the rolling stock subsystem**

### [F1Appendix I

#### **Aspects for which the technical specification is not available****(open points)**U.K.

Open points that relate to technical compatibility between the vehicle and the network:                   

Open points that do not relate to technical compatibility between the vehicle and the network:                   

### [F1Appendix J

#### **Technical specifications referred to in this TSI**U.K.

##### J.1**Standards or normative documents**U.K.

##### J.2**Technical documents (available on ERA website)**U.K.

1

OJ L 191, 18.7.2008, p. 1.                           

2

Regulation (EC) No 881/2004 of the European Parliament and of the Council of 29 April 2004 establishing a European Railway                              Agency (OJ L 164, 30.4.2004, p. 1).                           

3

Commission Decision 2008/232/EC of 21 February 2008 concerning a technical specification for interoperability relating to                              the rolling stock sub-system of the trans-European high speed rail system (OJ L 84, 26.3.2008, p. 132).                           

4

Commission Decision 2011/291/EU of 26 April 2011 concerning a technical specification for interoperability relating to the                              rolling stock subsystem — ‘Locomotives and passenger rolling stock’ of the trans-European conventional rail system (OJ L 139, 26.5.2011, p. 1).                           

5

[F1Directive (EU) 2016/797 of the European Parliament and of the Council of 11 May 2016 on the interoperability of the rail system within the European Union (OJ L 138, 26.5.2016, p. 44).]                            

6

Commission Regulation (EU) No 1301/2014 of 18 November 2014 on the technical specifications for interoperability relating                              to the ‘energy’ subsystem of the rail system in the Union (See page 179 of this Official Journal).                           

7

[F1Directive (EU) 2016/798 of the European Parliament and of the Council of 11 May 2016 on railway safety (OJ L 138, 26.5.2016, p. 102).]                            

8

to be evaluated on the total brake force, or on pressure in brake cylinders in case of pneumatic brake system; definition                              according to the specification referenced in Appendix J-1, index 25, clause 5.3.3.                           

9

Council Directive 98/83/EC of 3 November 1998 on the quality of water intended for human consumption (OJ L 330, 5.12.1998, p. 32).                           

10

Directive 2006/7/EC of the European Parliament and of the Council of 15 February 2006 concerning the management of bathing                              water quality and repealing Directive 76/160/EEC (OJ L 64, 4.3.2006, p. 37).                           

11

32006L0011: Directive 2006/11/EC of the European Parliament and of the Council of 15 February 2006 on pollution caused by                              certain dangerous substances discharged into the aquatic environment of the Community (OJ L 64, 4.3.2006, p. 52).                           

12

Directive 2009/30/EC of the European Parliament and of the Council of 23 April 2009 amending Directive 98/70/EC as regards                              the specification of petrol, diesel and gas-oil and introducing a mechanism to monitor and reduce greenhouse gas emissions                              and amending Council Directive 1999/32/EC as regards the specification of fuel used by inland waterway vessels and repealing                              Directive 93/12/EEC (OJ L 140, 5.6.2009, p. 88).                           

13

[F2Directive (EU) 2016/798 of the European Parliament and of the Council of 11 May 2016 on railway safety (OJ L 138, 26.5.2016, p. 102).]                            

14

Directive 2007/59/EC of the European Parliament and of the Council of 23 October 2007 on the certification of train drivers                              operating locomotives and trains on the railway system in the Community (OJ L 315, 3.12.2007, p. 51).                           

15

Commission Implementing Decision 2011/665/EU of 4 October 2011 on the European register of authorised types of railway vehicles                              (OJ L 264, 8.10.2011, p. 32).                           

16

[F2Commission Implementing Regulation (EU) 2019/773 of 16 May 2019 on the technical specification for interoperability relating to the operation and traffic management subsystem of the rail                                 system within the European Union and repealing Decision 2012/757/EU (OJ L 139 I, 27.5.2019, p. 5).]                            

17

Commission Decision 2010/713/EU of 9 November 2010 on modules for the procedures for assessment of conformity, suitability                              for use and EC verification to be used in the technical specifications for interoperability adopted under Directive 2008/57/EC                              of the European Parliament and of the Council (OJ L 319, 4.12.2010, p. 1).                           

18

Commission Recommendation of 20 September 2011 on the procedure demonstrating the level of compliance of existing railway                              lines with the basic parameters of the technical specifications for interoperability (OJ L 243, 21.9.2011, p. 23).                           

19

[F1Commission Implementing Regulation (EU) No 402/2013 of 30 April 2013 on the common safety method for risk evaluation and assessment and repealing Regulation (EC) No 352/2009 as referred to in                                 Article 6(3)(a) of Directive 2004/49/EC of the European Parliament and of the Council (OJ L 121, 3.5.2013, p. 8).]                            

20

[F1Commission Implementing Regulation (EU) 2018/545 of 4 April 2018 establishing practical arrangements for the railway vehicle authorisation and railway vehicle type authorisation process                                 pursuant to Directive (EU) 2016/797 of the European Parliament and of the Council (OJ L 90, 6.4.2018, p. 66).]                            

21

[F1Commission Decision 2010/713/EU of 9 November 2010 on modules for the procedures for assessment of conformity, suitability for use and EC verification to be used in the technical                                 specifications for interoperability adopted under Directive 2008/57/EC of the European Parliament and of the Council (OJ L 319, 4.12.2010, p. 1).]                            

22

[F1Commission Regulation (EU) No 1300/2014 of 18 November 2014 on the technical specifications for interoperability relating to accessibility of the Union's rail system for persons with                                 disabilities and persons with reduced mobility (OJ L 356, 12.12.2014, p. 110).]                            

23

[F1Commission Regulation (EU) No 1304/2014 of 26 November 2014 on the technical specification for interoperability relating to the subsystem ‘rolling stock — noise’ amending Decision 2008/232/EC and repealing Decision 2011/229/EU (OJ L 356, 12.12.2014, p. 421).]                            

24

[F1Commission Implementing Regulation (EU) 2019/777 of 16 May 2019 on the common specifications for the register of railway infrastructure and repealing Implementing Decision 2014/880/EU [RINF]                                 (OJ L 139 I, 27.5.2019, p. 312).]                            

Textual Amendments

F1Substituted by Commission Implementing Regulation (EU) 2019/776 of 16 May 2019 amending Commission Regulations (EU) No 321/2013, (EU) No                                    1299/2014, (EU) No 1301/2014, (EU) No 1302/2014, (EU) No 1303/2014 and (EU) 2016/919 and Commission Implementing Decision                                    2011/665/EU as regards the alignment with Directive (EU) 2016/797 of the European Parliament and of the Council and the implementation                                    of specific objectives set out in Commission Delegated Decision (EU) 2017/1474 (Text with EEA relevance).

F2Inserted by Commission Implementing Regulation (EU) 2019/776 of 16 May 2019 amending Commission Regulations (EU) No 321/2013, (EU) No                                    1299/2014, (EU) No 1301/2014, (EU) No 1302/2014, (EU) No 1303/2014 and (EU) 2016/919 and Commission Implementing Decision                                    2011/665/EU as regards the alignment with Directive (EU) 2016/797 of the European Parliament and of the Council and the implementation                                    of specific objectives set out in Commission Delegated Decision (EU) 2017/1474 (Text with EEA relevance).